Delta Electronics Ac Motor Drive Vfd Ve Series Users Manual Preface

Delta-Ac-Motor-Drive-Vfd-Ve-Series-Users-Manual-244556 delta-ac-motor-drive-vfd-ve-series-users-manual-244556

VFD-VE Series to the manual 0c97e4d2-6f85-48f8-9896-570cfef49bdd

2015-01-24

: Delta-Electronics Delta-Electronics-Ac-Motor-Drive-Vfd-Ve-Series-Users-Manual-338661 delta-electronics-ac-motor-drive-vfd-ve-series-users-manual-338661 delta-electronics pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 291

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-VE Series. The VFD-VE Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporates the latest
microprocessor technology available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following
safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at
hand and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-VE series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

DANGER!
1.
2.

AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before
opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels.

3.

Never reassemble internal components or wiring.

4.

The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.

5.

Ground the VFD-VE using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the
laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring
Diagram.

6.

VFD-VE series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1phase motors or other purpose.

7.

VFD-VE series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.

WARNING!
1.

DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive
easily damage by high-voltage.

2.

There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.

3.

Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.

CAUTION!
1.
2.

Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.

3.

Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.

4.

To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.

5.

When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the
motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.

6.

The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains
supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).

Table of Contents

Preface ............................................................................................................. i
Table of Contents .......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Nameplate Information................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 Model Explanation ...................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation ........................................................ 1-3
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances ................................................. 1-3
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring ............................................... 1-4
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions..................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Remove Keypad ......................................................................... 1-6
1.2.3 Remove Front Cover................................................................... 1-7
1.2.4 Lifting .......................................................................................... 1-8
1.3 Dimensions......................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 2-1
2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 External Wiring ................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Main Circuit ........................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection.............................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals ................................................................ 2-9

2.4 Control Terminals .............................................................................2-10
Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up ....................................3-1
3.1 Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 ..................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 .............................. 3-1
3.1.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01 ........................... 3-3
3.1.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad ................................................. 3-5
3.1.4 Reference Table for the LCD Display of the Digital Keypad........ 3-5
3.1.5 Operation Method........................................................................ 3-6
3.2 Start-up ...............................................................................................3-6
3.2.1 Preparations before Start-up ....................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Trial Run...................................................................................... 3-8
Chapter 4 Parameters..................................................................................4-1
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings.........................................................4-2
4.2 Version Differences ..........................................................................4-26
4.2.1 Version 2.02 .............................................................................. 4-26
4.2.2 Version 2.04 .............................................................................. 4-26
4.3 Description of Parameter Settings ....................................................4-38
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting .........................................................................5-1
5.1 Over Current (OC) ..............................................................................5-1
5.2 Ground Fault.......................................................................................5-2
5.3 Over Voltage (OV) ..............................................................................5-2
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv).................................................................................5-3
5.5 Over Heat (oH1, oH2, oH3) ................................................................5-4
5.6 Overload .............................................................................................5-4
5.7 Display of KPV-CE01 is Abnormal......................................................5-5

5.8 Phase Loss (PHL) .............................................................................. 5-5
5.9 Motor cannot Run............................................................................... 5-6
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed..................................................... 5-7
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration....................................................... 5-8
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected .............................................. 5-8
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise ...................................................... 5-9
5.14 Environmental Condition .................................................................. 5-9
5.15 Affecting Other Machines ............................................................... 5-10
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance................................ 6-1
6.1 Fault Code Information ....................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions............................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Reset .......................................................................................... 6-6
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections............................................................. 6-7
Appendix A Specifications ........................................................................ A-1
Appendix B Accessories ........................................................................... B-1
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives..............B-1
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors ............................ B-4
B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit ...................................................... B-6
B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit .......................................................... B-7
B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart ............................................................B-9
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart ..................................................................B-10
B.4 AC Reactor ......................................................................................B-11
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value................................... B-11
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value................................ B-11

B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor......................................................B-13
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A) ................................................. B-15
B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values................................................... B-16
B.7 Remote Controller RC-01 ................................................................ B-17
B.8 PG Card (for Encoder) .................................................................... B-18
B.8.1 EMV-PG01X .............................................................................B-18
B.8.2 EMV-PG01O .............................................................................B-21
B.8.3 EMV-PG01L..............................................................................B-25
B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference .................................................... B-29
B.9.1 Dimensions ...............................................................................B-33
B.10 Multi-function I/O Extension Card.................................................. B-40
B.10.1 Functions ................................................................................B-40
B.10.2 Dimensions .............................................................................B-42
B.10.3 Wiring......................................................................................B-42
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive .............................. C-1
C.1 Capacity Formulas ............................................................................ C-1
C.2 General Precaution ........................................................................... C-3
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor....................................................... C-5

Chapter 1 Introduction
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to
retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used
for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:

CAUTION!
1.

Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.

2.

Store within an ambient temperature range of -10 °C to +40 °C.

3.

Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.

4.

Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.

5.

DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.

6.

DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.

7.

If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.

8.

When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction|

1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-VE AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick

Start and CD.


Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.



Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.

1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 5HP/3.7kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive
AC Drive Model
Input Spec.
Output S pec.
Output Frequency Range

MODE
: VFD037V23A-2
INPUT
: 3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 19.6A
OUTPUT
: 3PH 0-240V 17A 6.5kVA 5HP
Freq. Range : 0.00~600.00Hz
ENCLOSURE: TYPE 1

Enclosure type
Serial Number & Bar Code

037V23A2T6360001

1.1.2 Model Explanation
VFD 037 V 23 A- 2

VFD-VE Series
Version Type
Mains Input Voltage
23: 230V Three phase 43: 460V Three phase
Vector Series
Applicable motor capacity
007: 1 HP(0.7kW)
150: 20HP(15kW)
022: 3 HP(2.2kW)
220: 30 HP(22kW)
037: 5 HP(3.7kW)
300: 40HP(30kW)
055: 7.5HP(5.5kW) 370: 50 HP(37kW)
075: 10 HP(7.5kW) 450: 60HP(45kW)
110: 15 HP(11kW)
550: 75HP(55kW)
750: 100HP(75kW)
Series Name ( V ariable F requency D rive)

1-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

1.1.3 Series Number Explanation

037V23A2 T 7 36

230V 3-phase 5HP(3.7kW)

Production number
Production week
Production year 2007
Production factory
(T: Taoyuan, W: Wujian)
Model

If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.

1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances
1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)

1-3

Chapter 1 Introduction|

15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D)

40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E)

Frame Power range

Models

B (B1) 1-3hp (0.75-2.2kW)

VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2,
VFD022V23A/43A-2

B (B2) 5hp (3.7kW)

VFD037V23A/43A-2

C

7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW)

VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2

D

15-30hp (11-22kW)

VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2,
VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2

E (E1) 40-60hp (30-45kW)

VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2

E (E2) 40-100hp (30-75kW)

VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2,
VFD750V43C-2

Please refer to Chapter 1.3 for exact dimensions.

1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:

1-4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Operation

Storage
Transportation

Air Temperature:

-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 122°F)

Relative Humidity:

<90%, no condensation allowed

Atmosphere
pressure:
Installation Site
Altitude:

86 ~ 106 kPa
<1000m

Vibration:

<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max

Temperature:

-20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)

Relative Humidity:

<90%, no condensation allowed

Atmosphere
pressure:

86 ~ 106 kPa
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max

Vibration:
Pollution Degree

2: good for a factory type environment.

Minimum Mounting Clearances

H

Air Flow

FWD
RE V

PROG
DATA

W

W

H

HP
1-5HP
7.5-20HP
25-75HP
100HP and above

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

W
mm (inch)
50 (2)
75 (3)
75 (3)
75 (3)

H
mm (inch)
150 (6)
175 (7)
200 (8)
250 (10)

1-5

Chapter 1 Introduction|

CAUTION!
1.

Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.

2.
3.

Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions
are not allowed.

4.

The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.

5.

The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.

6.

When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within -10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor
drive in a space with bad ventilation.

7.

When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.

8.

Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.

1.2.2 Remove Keypad
1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)

1-6

7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D)

40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E)

1.2.3 Remove Front Cover
1-5HP/0.75-3.7kW (Frame B)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW (Frame C)

1-7

Chapter 1 Introduction|

15-30HP/11-22kW (Frame D)

40-100HP/30-75kW (Frame E)

1.2.4 Lifting
Please carry only fully assembled AC motor drives as shown in the following.
For 40-100HP (Frame E and E1)
Step 1

1-8

Step 2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Step 3

Step 4

1.3 Dimensions

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

1-9

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Frame B
D

S1

H

D1
D2

H1

W
W1

S2

Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
B1

B2

W

W1

H

H1

D

D1

D2

S1

S2

150.0

135.0

260.0

244.3

160.2

67.0

4.0

8.0

6.5

[5.91]

[5.32]

[10.24]

[9.63]

[6.31]

[2.64]

[0.16]

[0.32]

[0.26]

150.0

135.0

272.1

244.3

183.7

67.0

4.0

8.0

6.5

[5.91]

[5.32]

[10.72]

[9.63]

[7.24]

[2.64]

[0.16]

[0.32]

[0.26]

NOTE
Frame B1: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2
Frame B2: VFD037V23A/43A-2

1-10

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Frame C
D

H1
H

W
W1

S1

S2

Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
C

W

W1

H

H1

D

200.0

185.6

323.0

244.3

160.2

[7.88]

[7.31]

[12.73]

[9.63]

[6.31]

-

-

S1

S2

7.0

7.0

[0.28]

[0.28]

NOTE
Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

1-11

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Frame D
D
W
W1

H1
H

D1
D2

S1

Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
D

W

W1

250.0

226.0

[9.85]

[8.90]

H

H1

D

D1

D2

S1

408.2

384.0

205.4

110.0

10.0

10.0

[16.07]

[15.13]

[8.08]

[4.33]

[0.39]

[0.39]

-

NOTE
Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2

1-12

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 1 Introduction|

Frame E
W
W1

D

H

H2
H1

D1

S3

D2

S2

S1

Unit: mm[inch]
Frame
E1

E2

W

W1

370.0

335.0

[14.57] [13.19]
370.0

335.0

H
-

H1

H2

D

D1

589.0

560.0

260.0

132.5

18.0

13.0

13.0

18.0

[23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22]

[0.71]

[0.51]

[0.51]

[0.71]

595.0

589.0

560.0

260.0

D2

S1

S2

S3

132.5

18.0

13.0

13.0

18.0

[14.57] [13.19] [23.43] [23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22]

[0.71]

[0.51]

[0.51]

[0.71]

NOTE
Frame E1: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2
Frame E2: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

1-13

Chapter 1 Introduction|

This page intentionally left blank

1-14

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
After removing the front cover (see chapter 1.2.3 for details), check if the power and control terminals
are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring.


General Wiring Information
Applicable Codes
All VFD-VE series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters
Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions
provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL
and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and
the motor nameplate for electrical data.
The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for
each VFD-VE Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all
installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required.

CAUTION!
1.

Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as
indicated on the nameplate.

2.

Check following items after finishing the wiring:
A. Are all connections correct?
B. No loose wires?
C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?

DANGER!
1.

A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and
wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC
motor drive.

2.

All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike
or electric shock.

3.

Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.

4.

Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

2.1 Wiring
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The
pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad KPV-CE01 only and should not be used
for RS-485 communication.

Figure 1 for models of VFD-VE Series (15 HP/11kW and below)
VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2,
VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2, VFD110V23A/43A-2
DC choke
(optional) Br ak e res istor
(optional)
Jumper

F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker)

+1 +2/B1
R(L1)
S( L2)
T( L3)
E

R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
Recommended Circuit
SA
when power s uppl y
MC
is turned O FF by a
fault output.
If the fault occur s, the
ON
OF F
MC
contact will be O N to turn
off the power and pr otect the power sy stem.
F WD/ST OP

F act ory set ting :
SINK Mod e

REV/STO P

Sink

Sw1

F ac tor y
Source
setting
Please refer to
F ig ure 3 f or wirin g
o f S INK m o de an d
SO URCEm od e.

Multi-s tep 1
Multi-s tep 2
Multi-s tep 3
Multi-s tep 4
No function
No function

Digital Si gnal Com mon
* Don't apply the mains v oltage directly
to abov e terminals.
ACI cur rent/v oltage selection
ACI Switch
Make sure that power is OF F
befor e changing the switch 5K
setting.
0-20mA
0-10V

B2 U(T 1)
V(T2)
E

RB

RA

RC

RB
RC

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

MRA
MRC
MO1

MO2

AVI

2

Master Fr equency
0 to 10V 47k

DCM

ACI

4~20mA/0~10V

AUI
ACM

-10~+ 10V
Analog Multi- func tion Output Terminal
AF M analog output selection
AF M Switch
Make sure that power is OF F
befor e changing the switch
setting.
0-10V

0-20mA
Main c ircui t (power) terminals
NOTE

2-2

Analog S ignal Common
E

AFM

Multi-function c ontact output 1
(r elay)
factory setti ng: fault indi cation
Multi-function c ontact output 2
(r elay)
48VDC 50mA
factory setti ng:
indicates that i t is running
Multi-function c ontact output 3
(photocoupler)
Multi-function c ontact output 4
(photocoupler)

MCM
DFM

E

+10V

1

IM
3~

W(T3)

Power supply
+10V 20mA

3

Motor

Multi-function
Photocoupler O utput
Digital F requency Output
Ter minal
factory setti ng: 1:1
Duty =50%, 10V DC
Digital Si gnal Com mon
DFM output s ignal selec tion
DFM Switch
Make sure that power is OF F
befor e changing the switch
setting.
OC

TP

RS-485 s erial communication
1: +E V
2: G ND
F or c ommunic ation,
3: SG it needs to use
4: SG +
VF D- USB01/IF D8500
5: NC
to connect to PC.
6: NC

0~ 10VDC/ 2mA

ACM
Analog S ignal common

E
Contr ol c ircuit ter minals

Shielded l eads & Cable

T he brake resis tor is built-in to model VF D110V43B.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Figure 2 for models of VFD-VE Series (20HP/15kW and above)
VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2, VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2,
VFD450V43A-2, VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2
D C choke
(optional)

brake unit
(optional)

brake resi stor
(optional)

VF DB
Jumper

F us e/N F B(N o F use B reaker)

R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R ecommended C irc ui t
SA
w hen power s upply
MC
is turned O FF by a
fault output.
If the fault occ ur s, the
ON
OF F
MC
contact w ill be O N to turn
off the power and pr otec t the power s ystem.
F act ory set tin g:
SIN K Mo de

F WD /ST OP

Sw1

Multi-s tep 1

R EV/STO P

Sink

F ac tor y
Source
setting
Please refer to
F ig ure 3 f or wiring
o f S IN K m o de an d
SO UR CEm od e.

Multi-s tep 2
Multi-s tep 3
Multi-s tep 4
No function
No function

D igital Si gnal C ommon
* Don't apply the mains voltage direc tly
to abov e terminals.
AC I cur rent/v oltage selection
AC I Switch
Make sure that pow er is OF F
befor e c hanging the switch 5K
setting.
0-20mA
0-10V

-( min us sig n)

+1 +2
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
E

Motor

U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T 3)
E

RB

RA

RC

RB
RC

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

MRA
MRC
MO1

MO2

MCM
DFM

E

+10V
AVI

2

Master Fr equency
0 to 10V 47k

1

DCM

ACI

4~20mA/0~10V

AUI
ACM

-10~+ 10V
Analog Multi- func tion Output Terminal
AF M analog output selec tion
AF M Sw itch
Make sure that pow er is OF F
befor e c hanging the sw itch
setting.
0-10V

0-20mA
Main c irc ui t (power) terminals
NOTE

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Analog S ignal Common
E

AFM

Multi-function c ontact output 1
(r elay)
factory setti ng: fault indication
Multi-function c ontact output 2
(r elay)
48VD C 50mA
factory setti ng:
indicates that it is running
Multi-function c ontact output 3
(photocoupler)
Multi-function c ontact output 4
(photocoupler)

Pow er supply
+10V 20m A

3

IM
3~

0~ 10VDC/ 2mA

ACM
Analog S ignal common

E
C ontr ol c ircuit ter minals

Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
D igital F requency Output
Ter minal
factory setti ng: 1:1
D uty =50%, 10V DC
D igital Si gnal C ommon
DFM output s ignal s el ec ti on
D FM Sw itch
Make sure that pow er is OF F
befor e c hanging the sw itch
setting.
TP
OC
R S-485 serial communication
1: +E V
2: G ND
F or c om munic ati on,
3: SG it needs to use
4: SG +
VF D- USB01/IF D8500
5: N C
to connect to PC .
6: N C
Shielded l eads & Cable

T he brake resis tor is built-i n to model V FD 110V43B.

2-3

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Figure 3 Wiring for SINK(NPN) mode and SOURCE(PNP) mode

SINK/NPN Mode
Sink
SW1
Source

FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step1
Multi-step2

Factory
setting

Multi-step3
Multi-step4
No Function
No Function
Digital Signal Common

*Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM
E

SOURCE/PNP Mode
Sink
SW1
Source

FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step1
Multi-step2

Factory
setting

Multi-step3
Multi-step4
No Function
No Function

*Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM
E

CAUTION!
1.
2.

The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.
Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the
terminal.

3.

Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield
wire or tube.

2.2 External Wiring
2-4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Items

Power Supply

Power
supply

Fuse/NFB
(Optional)

There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.

Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)

Please do not use a Magnetic
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.

FUSE/NFB

Magnetic
contactor

Input AC
Line Reactor

Zero-phase
Reactor

+/B1
B2

Br eak res istor
(optional)

T/L3

BR

S/L2

Br eak res istor
(optional)

R/L1

Br eak unit ( optional)

EMI Filter

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

E
Zero-phase
Reactor
Output AC
Line Reactor

Motor

Explanations
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.

Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
Input AC
Line Reactor line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
(Optional)
or more or advanced capacity is
activated .The wiring distance should
be ≤ 10m. Refer to appendix B for
details.
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
Zero-phase
audio equipment is installed near the
Reactor
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
(Ferrite Core
on both the input and output sides.
Common
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
Choke)
range from AM band to 10MHz.
(Optional)
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
EMI filter
(Optional)

To reduce electromagnetic
interference, please refer to Appendix
B for more details.

Brake
Resistor
(Optional)

Used to reduce the deceleration time
of the motor. Please refer to the chart
in Appendix B for specific Brake
Resistors.

Motor surge voltage amplitude
Output AC
depends on motor cable length. For
Line Reactor
applications with long motor cable
(Optional)
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
reactor at the inverter output side

2.3 Main Circuit
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-5

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Figure 1 for the main terminals
No-fuse br eak er
( NF B)

R
S
T

MC

Br ak e res istor(O pti onal)

B2 -

+1 +2/B1

R (L1 )
S(L2 )
T(L 3)

U (T 1)

Motor

IM
3~

V(T2 )
W(T3 )

E

E

Figure 2 for the main terminals
V FDB

R
S
T

N o-fuse br eak er
(NF B)
MC

+1

-

+2

R (L1 )
S(L2 )
T(L 3)

U (T 1)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
+1, +2
+2/B1, B2
+2~(-), +2/B1~(-)

Motor

V(T2 )
W(T3 )

E

Terminal Symbol

Br ak e res istor
( optional)

IM
3~

E

Explanation of Terminal Function
AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase)
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase
induction motor
Connections for DC Choke (optional)
Connections for Brake Resistor (optional)
Connections for External Brake Unit (VFDB series)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.

2-6

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage

breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It
is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.


It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.



Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks



Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.



When using leakage-current breaker to prevent leakage current,



Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor

which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.

drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.


Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.

Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)
When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor

terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively, the motor will rotate counterclockwise (as
viewed on the shaft end of the motor) when a forward operation command is received. To
permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation, switch over any of the two motor
leads.

Forward
running


DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output



With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current,

terminals of AC motor drives.
high leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable
should be less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than
50m for 5.5kW models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.


Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.

Terminals [+1, +2] for connecting DC reactor

DC reactor
Jumper

+1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-7

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|



To improve power factor and reduce harmonics connect a DC reactor between terminals
[+1, +2]. Please remove the jumper before connecting the DC reactor.

NOTE Models of 15kW and above have a built-in DC reactor.
Terminals [+2/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor and terminals [+1, +2/B1] for
connecting external brake unit
Brake resistor(optional)
BR
Brake unit(optional)
VFDB
Refer to Appendix B for the use of
BR
spec ial braking resis tor/unit



B2
+2/B1
+2/B1
Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps,

short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque.


If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (all models of 11kW and below),



Models of 15kW and above don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an

connect the external brake resistor to the terminals [＋2/B1, B2].
external optional brake unit (VFDB-series) and brake resistor. Refer to VFDB series user
manual for details.


Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals



When not used, please leave the terminals [+2/B1, -] open.

[+2(+2/B1), (-)]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with twisted cable.

WARNING!
1.

Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+2/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.
Grounding terminals ( )
Make sure that the leads are connected correctly and the AC drive is properly grounded.

(Ground resistance should not exceed 0.1Ω.)


Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.



Multiple VFD-VE units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded
directly to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no
ground loops.

excellent

2-8

good

not allowed

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame B

Main circuit terminals
, +1, +2/B1, -, B2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models

Wire

Torque

Wire Type

VFD007V23A-2
VFD007V43A-2
VFD015V23A-2
VFD015V43A-2
VFD022V23A-2

14-10 AWG
(2.1-5.3mm2)

Stranded
18kgf-cm
copper only,
(15.6in-lbf)
75oC

VFD022V43A-2
+1

+2 B1

-

VFD037V23A-2
B2

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Screw Torque :
18Kgf-cm
Wire Gauge :
18~10AWG

VFD037V43A-2

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Main circuit terminals

Frame C

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models

, +1, +2/B1, -, B2

Wire

Torque

Wire Type

12-8 AWG
(3.3-8.4mm2)

30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)

Stranded
copper only,
75 oC

VFD055V23A-2
VFD075V23A-2
VFD110V43B-2
VFD055V43A-2
VFD075V43A-2
POWER

IM
3

MOTOR

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-9

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Main circuit terminals

Frame D

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models

, +1, +2, -

Wire

Torque

Wire Type

8-2 AWG
(8.4-33.6mm2)

30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)

Stranded
copper only,
75 oC

VFD110V23A-2
VFD110V43A-2
VFD150V43A-2
VFD150V23A-2
VFD185V23A-2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1
POWER

+2

DC (+)

-

DC ( - )

V/T2 W/T3
IM
3

MOTOR

VFD185V43A-2
VFD220V43A-2
VFD220V23A-2

Main circuit terminals

Frame E

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models

POWER
ALARM

Wire

, +1, +2, Torque

VFD300V43A-2

CHARGE

57kgf-cm

VFD370V43A-2

(49in-lbf)

VFD450V43A-2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
POWER

+1

+2
Screw Torque:
200kgf-cm (173in-lbf)

Wire Type

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
IM
3

MOTOR

VFD300V23A-2

Stranded
copper
only, 75 oC

4-2 AWG
(21.2-33.6mm2)

VFD370V23A-2

200kgf-cm

VFD550V43C-2

(173in-lbf)

VFD750V43C-2

NOTE
# To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) wires, use Recognized Ring Terminals
2.4 Control Terminals
Circuit diagram for digital inputs (SINK current 16mA.)
2-10

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

SINK Mode

SOURCE Mode

DCM

+24

Multi-Input
Terminal

multi-input
terminal

DCM

Internal Circuit

+24V

Internal Circuit

The Position of the Control Terminals
MRA RA RC

MCM +24V FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 DFM +10V AVI ACM
MRC RB
MO1 MO2 DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 AFM AUI ACI

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-11

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Terminal symbols and functions
Terminal
Symbol
FWD

Factory Settings (SINK)

Terminal Function

Forward-Stop Command

REV

Reverse-Stop Command

+24V

DC Voltage Source

ON: Connect to DCM
ON:

Run in FWD direction

OFF:

Stop acc. to Stop Method

ON:

Run in REV direction

OFF:

Stop acc. to Stop Method

+24VDC, 80mA, used for SOURCE mode.

MI1

Multi-function Input 1

MI2

Multi-function Input 2

MI3

Multi-function Input 3

Refer to Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06 for programming
the Multi-function Inputs.

MI4

Multi-function Input 4

ON: the activation current is 6.5mA. OFF:
leakage current tolerance is 10μA.

MI5

Multi-function Input 5

MI6

Multi-function Input 6
Digital Frequency Meter
(Open Collector Output)

Pulse voltage output monitor signal,
proportional to output frequency

DFM-DCM

Duty-cycle:

50%

Ratio:

Pr.02-18

J5

DFM

internal circuit

DCM

Max: 48V
50mA
50%

100%

Digital Signal Common

RA

Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.O.) a

RB

Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.C.) b

Min. load:

4.7kΩ

Max. current:

50mA

Max. voltage:

48Vdc

Jumper:

DFM jumper, factory
setting is OC

Common for digital inputs and used for SINK
mode.

Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC

RC

Multi-function Relay Common

MRA

Multi-function Relay Output 2
(N.O.) a

MRC

Multi-function Relay Common

5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
To output monitor signal, including in operation,
frequency arrival, overload and etc.
Refer to Pr.02-11~02-12 for programming

2-12

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Factory Settings (SINK)

Terminal
Symbol

Terminal Function

+10V

Potentiometer Power Supply

+10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm)

MCM

Multi-function Output
Common (Photocoupler)

Max. 48VDC 50mA

MO1

Multi-function Output 1
(Photocoupler)

ON: Connect to DCM

Maximum 48VDC, 50mA
Refer to Pr.02-13 to Pr.02-14 for programming
Max: 48Vdc
50mA

MO1~MO2-DCM

MO1~MO2

MO2

Multi-function Output 2
(Photocoupler)
MCM
Internal Circuit

Analog voltage Input
+10V

AVI

AVI circuit

Impedance:

200kΩ

Resolution:

12 bits

Range:

0 ~ 10VDC = 0 ~ Max. Output
Frequency (Pr.01-00)

Set-up:

Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02

Impedance:

250Ω

AVI

ACM
internal circuit

Analog current Input
ACI

ACI circuit

Resolution:

12 bits

Range:

4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)

ACI

ACM internal circuit

Auxiliary analog voltage input
+10
~
-10V

AUI

AUI circuit

Set-up:

Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02

Jumper:

ACI jumper, factory setting is
4-20mA

Impedance:

200kΩ

Resolution:

12 bits

Range:

-10 ~ +10VDC =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)

AUI

Set-up:

Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02

ACM
internal circuit

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-13

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

Terminal
Symbol

Factory Settings (SINK)

Terminal Function

ON: Connect to DCM
Impedance:

Analog output meter

1.1mΩ (current output)
Output current

20mA max

Resolution:

max. frequency corresponds to
0-10V

AFM
AFM
0~20mA
ACM

ACM

18.5kΩ (voltage output)

Analog control signal
(common)

Range:

0 ~ 10V/0 ~ 20mA

Function:

Pr.03-18

Switch:

AFM switch, factory setting is 010V

Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM

*Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire.
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it

as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting
the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.


If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect
a capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:

AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM

ferrite core
wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI6, DCM)
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality

components to avoid contact bounce.
Digital outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)
Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.



When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode
across the coil and check the polarity.

2-14

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|

General
Keep control wiring as far as possible from the power wiring and in separate conduits to

avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.


The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live
power wiring or terminals.

NOTE


If a filter is required for reducing EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference), install it as close as



When using a GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor with

possible to AC drive. EMI can also be reduced by lowering the Carrier Frequency.
sensitivity of 200mA, and not less than 0.1-second detection time to avoid nuisance
tripping.

DANGER!
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes
in contact with high voltage.
The specification for the control terminals

The Position of the Control Terminals

MRA RA RC
MCM +24V FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 DFM +10V AVI ACM
MRC RB
MO1 MO2 DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 AFM AUI ACI

Frame

Torque

Wire

B, C, D, E, E1

8 kgf-cm (6.9 in-lbf)

22-14 AWG (0.3-2.1mm2)

NOTE
Frame B: VFD007V23A/43A-2, VFD015V23A/43A-2, VFD022V23A/43A-2, VFD037V23A/43A-2;
Frame C: VFD055V23A/43A-2, VFD075V23A/43A-2, VFD110V43B-2,
Frame D: VFD110V23A/43A-2, VFD150V23A/43A-2, VFD185V23A/43A-2, VFD220V23A/43A-2
Frame E: VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2, VFD450V43A-2
Frame E1: VFD300V23A-2, VFD370V23A-2, VFD550V43C-2, VFD750V43C-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2-15

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up

3.1 Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
3.1.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
LED Display

F
H
U

Display frequency, current, voltage
and error, etc.

KPV-CE01
EXTPU

Part Number
Status Display

Display of driver status

MODE Selection Key

Press this key to view different
operating values

JOG

PU

Left Key

moves cursor to the left

Right Key

Moves the cursor right

FWD/REV Direction Key

RUN key

RUN

Display Message

STOP
RESET
STOP/RESET

Descriptions
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.
Displays the actual output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3.
User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00-05)

Displays the output current present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

The counter value (C).

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

3-1

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

Display Message

Descriptions
Displays the selected parameter.

Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.

External Fault.
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by
pressing
key. After a parameter value has been set, the new
value is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
,

and

keys.

Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.

3-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

3.1.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPV-CE01
Selection mode

F

START
F

F
H
U

F
H

H

H
U

U

U

MODE

MODE

F
H
U
MODE

MODE

MODE

GO START
NOTE: In the selection mode, press

to set the parameters.

To set parameters
F
H
U
F
H
U

F
H
U

parameter set successfully

F
H
U

F
H
U

parameter set error
MODE

move to previous display

NOTE: In the parameter setting mode, you can press

MODE

to return to the selection mode.

To shift cursor

START
F

F

F

F

F

H
U

H
U

F

H
U

F

H
U

H
U

To modify data

F

START

H
U

H
U

H
U

To switch display mode

F

START

H
U

F

F

H
U

MODE

F

H
U

F

H
U

F

H
U

H
U

MODE

F

H
U

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

F

H
U

F

H
U

F

H
U

3-3

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

To copy parameters 1
Copy parameters from the AC Motor Drive to the KPV-CE01
F

F

F
H

H

H
U

U

F
H
U

U

F
H
U

about 2-3 seconds
F
H
U

F
H
U

It will display "End" to indicate that
the first parameter is saved, then
return to "rEAd0".

start blinking

F

F

U

U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H

H

H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

start blinking

It will display "End" to indicate that
the second parameter is saved, then
return to "rEAd1".

about 2-3 seconds

To copy parameters 2
Copy parameters from the KPV-CE01 to the AC Motor Drive
F

F

U

U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H

H

H
U

It will display "End" to indicate that
the first parameter is saved, then
return to "SAvEv".

start blinking

F

F
H

H

H
U

U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

about 2-3 seconds
F

F
H
U

U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

start blinking
about 2-3 seconds

3-4

F
H
U

F
H
U

F
H
U

It will display "End" to indicate that
the second parameter is saved, then
return to "SAvEv".

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

3.1.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad
Unit: mm [inch]

F
H
U

KPV-CEO1
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT

JOG

MODE

FWD
REV

PU

PU

LABEL1

PROG
DATA

STOP
RESET

RUN

3.1.4 Reference Table for the LCD Display of the Digital Keypad
Digital

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

b

Cc

d

E

F

G

Hh

I

Jj

K

L

n

Oo

P

q

r

S

Tt

U

v

Y

Z

LCD

English
alphabet
LCD

English
alphabet
LCD

English
alphabet
LCD

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

3-5

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

3.1.5 Operation Method
Refer to 3.1.2 How to operate the digital keypad KPV-CE01 and chapter 4 parameters for
setting. Please choose a suitable method depending on application and operation rule. The
operation is usually used as shown in the following table.
Operation Method

Operation Command
Source

Frequency Source

RUN

KPV-CE01 keypad

F act ory set tin g:
SINK Mo de

F WD/S TOP

Sw1

Multi-s tep 1

REV/STO P

Sink

F ac tor y
Source
setting
Please refer to
F ig ure 3 f or wiring
o f S INK m o de an d
SO URCEm od e.

Multi-s tep 2
Multi-s tep 3
Multi-s tep 4
No function
No function

Digital Si gnal Common
* Don't apply the mains voltage direc tly
to abov e terminals.

Operate from
external signal

ACI cur rent/v oltage selection
ACI Switch
Make sure that power is OF F
befor e c hanging the switch 5K
setting.
0-20mA
0-10V

STOP
RESET

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM
E

+10V

Power supply
+10V 20mA

3

AVI

2

Master Fr equency
0 to 10V 47k

1

ACI

4~20mA/0~10V

AUI
-10~+ 10V
ACM
Analog Multi- func ti on Output Termi nal
AF M analog output selec tion
AF M Switch
Make sure that power is OF F
befor e c hanging the switch
setting.
0-10V

0-20mA

Main c irc ui t (power) terminals

Operate from
communication

Contr ol c ircuit ter minals

Analog S ignal Common
E

AFM

0~ 10VDC/ 2mA

ACM
Analog S ignal common

E

Shielded l eads & Cable

Please refer to the communication address 2000H and 2119H settings in the
communication address definition.

3.2 Start-up
3.2.1 Preparations before Start-up
3-6

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

Carefully check the following items before proceeding.
Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the output terminals U, V, W.

are NOT connected to power and that the drive is well grounded.


Verify that there are no short-circuits between terminals and from terminals to ground or



Check for loose terminals, connectors or screws.



Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor



Make sure that all switches are OFF before applying power to ensure that the AC motor



Make sure that the front cover is well installed before applying power.



Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.



The keypad shows briefly "Delta" and then should light up as follows (normal status with

mains power.

drive doesn’t start running and there is no abnormal operation after applying power.

no error)
F
H
U
KPV-CE01
EXT PU

JOG

RUN

PU

STOP
RESET

- If the drive has built-in fan (2hp/1.5kW and above) it should run. The factory setting
of Fan Control Pr.07-19=00 (Fan always on).

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

3-7

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

3.2.2 Trial Run
After finishing checking the items in “3.2.1 preparation before start-up”, you can perform a
trial run. The factory setting of operation source is from keypad (Pr.00-20=00).
1. After applying power, verify that LED “F”
is on and the display shows 60.00Hz.

F
KPV-CE01

KPV-CE01

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

2. Setting frequency to about 5Hz by using
key.
3. Pressing

F

RUN

And if you want to change to reverse
running, you should press

KPV-CE01

KPV-CE01

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

key. The

LED will display the status. And if you
want to decelerate to stop, please press
STOP
RESET

F

key for forward running.

F

F
KPV-CE01

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

key.

4. Check following items:

F
F

KPV-CE01

 Check if the motor direction of rotation
is correct.

KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

 Check if the motor runs steadily
without abnormal noise and vibration.
 Check if acceleration and deceleration

F

KPV-CE01

are smooth.

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

KPV-CE01

If the results of trial run are normal, please
start formal run.

RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

F

KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

PU

RUN
F
KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

KPV-CE01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU

3-8

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

NOTE
1.

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

Please stop running immediately if any fault occurs and refer to troubleshooting for solving the
problem.

2.

Please do NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to
hazardous voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.

3.

To avoid damage to components, do not touch them or the circuit boards with metal objects or
your bare hands.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

3-9

Chapter 3 Digital Keypad Operation and Start Up|

This page intentionally left blank.

3-10

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters
The VFD-VE parameters are divided into 12 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications,
the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during
operation.

The 12 groups are as follows:
Group 0: System Parameters
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 4: Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Group 5: Motor Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 7: Special Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 9: Communication Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Group 11: Advanced Parameters

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-1

Chapter 4 Parameters|

4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 System Parameters
Pr.
00-00
00-01

00-02

00-03

00-04

00-05
00-06
00-07
00-08
00-09

00-10

00-11
00-12

00-13

4-2

Explanation
Identity Code of the AC
motor drive
Rated Current Display of
the AC motor drive

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0
○ ○
○
○
○

Settings
Read-only
Read-only

0: No function
1: Read only
2: Enable group 11 parameters setting
8: Keypad lock
Parameter Reset
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz,
220V/380V)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz,
220V/440V)
0: Display the frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
Start-up Display Selection
2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)
3: Display the output current (A)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (C)
2: Display output frequency (H)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage ( u )
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Output power factor angle (n)
6: Display output power (kW)
7: Display actual motor speed (HU)
8: Display estimate output torque (kg-m)
9: Display PG position (G) (refer to Pr.10-00 and Pr.1001)
10: Display PID feedback
Content of Multi Function
11: Display AVI (%)
Display
12: Display ACI (%)
13: Display AUI (%)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
15: Display the temperature of IGBT (°C)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF)
18: Multi-step speed
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output
21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card)
Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
User-Defined Coefficient K
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999
Software Version
Read-only
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
Password Input
0 to 2: times of wrong password
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
Password Set
0: No password set or successful input in Pr.00-07
1: Password has been set
10~1000 %
Energy Saving Gain
0: V/f Control
1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG)
Control Method
2: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
4: Torque control + Encoder (TQRPG)
0: V/f curve determined by group 01
V/f Curve Selection
1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve
0: Constant Torque (100%)
Constant/Variable Torque
1: Variable Torque (125%)
Selection
Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration
Setting

0: Linear accel./decel. I
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel.

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

#.#
0

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

0

○

○

○

○

○

100%
0

○

○

○

○
○

○

0

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

00-14
00-15
00-16

Explanation

Time Unit for
Acceleration/Deceleration
and S Curve
Reserved
Reserved

00-17 Carrier Frequency
Auto Voltage Regulation
00-18 (AVR) Function
Auto Energy-saving
00-19 Operation

Source of the Master
00-20 Frequency Command

Source of the Operation
00-21 Command
00-22 Stop Method
00-23 Reverse Operation

Settings
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12
to 01-21)
0: Unit: 0.01 second
1: Unit: 0.1 second

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting

0

○

○

○

○

1~15KHz

10

○

○

○

○

○

0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR when deceleration stop
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15
without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15)
0: Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP
disabled.
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-3

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 1 Basic Parameters
Pr.

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

5.0
10.0
0.50

○
○

○

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

5.0
10.0
0.00

○

○

○

○

○

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

0.0
0.0
0.50
600.00

○

○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Settings

01-12

Accel Time 1

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-13

Decel Time 1

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-14

Accel Time 2

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-15

Decel Time 2

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-16

Accel Time 3

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-17

Decel Time 3

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-18

Accel Time 4

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-19

Decel Time 4

01-20

JOG Acceleration Time

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-21

JOG Deceleration Time

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-22

JOG Frequency

0.00~600.00Hz

10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
10.00/
10.0
1.00/
1.0
1.00/
1.0
6.00

1st/4th Accel/decel
Frequency
S-curve for Acceleration
Departure Time 1
S-curve for Acceleration
Arrival Time 2
S-curve for Deceleration
Departure Time 1
S-curve for Deceleration
Arrival Time 2
Skip Frequency 1 (upper
limit)
Skip Frequency 1 (lower
limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (upper
limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (lower
limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (upper
limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (lower
limit)

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~25.00 sec/0.00~250.0 sec

0.2/0.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec

0.2/0.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec

0.2/0.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec

0.2/0.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

60.00/

○

○

○

○

01-01
01-02
01-03
01-04
01-05
01-06
01-07
01-08
01-09
01-10

01-23
01-24
01-25
01-26
01-27
01-28
01-29
01-30
01-31
01-32
01-33
01-34

Mode Selection when
Frequency < Fmin

01-35

1st Output Frequency

50.00~600.00Hz

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG

01-11

01-00

4-4

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

Factory
Setting
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
220.0
440.0
0.50

Explanation
Maximum Output
Frequency
1st Output Frequency
Setting 1
1st Output Voltage
Setting 1
2nd Output Frequency
Setting 1
2nd Output Voltage
Setting 1
3rd Output Frequency
Setting 1
3rd Output Voltage
Setting 1
4th Output Frequency
Setting 1
4th Output Voltage
Setting 1
Start Frequency
Output Frequency Upper
Limit
Output Frequency Lower
Limit

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00~600.00Hz
0.00~600.00Hz

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

0: Output Waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
0.00~600.00Hz

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

01-36
01-37
01-38
01-39
01-40
01-41
01-42

Explanation
Setting 2
1st Output Voltage
Setting 2
2nd Output Frequency
Setting 2
2nd Output Voltage
Setting 2
3rd Output Frequency
Setting 2
3rd Output Voltage
Setting 2
4th Output Frequency
Setting 2
4th Output Voltage
Setting 2

Settings
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
50.00
220.0 ○
○
○
○
○
440.0
0.50
○
○

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

5.0/
10.0
0.50

○
○

○

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~600.00Hz

5.0/
10.0
0.00

○

○

○

○

230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V

0.0/
0.0

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

○

○

○

○

4-5

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Pr.

Explanation

02-00

2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control

02-01

Multi-Function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3wire operation)

02-02
Multi-Function Input
Command 2 (MI2)
02-03

Multi-Function Input
Command 3 (MI3)

02-04

Multi-Function Input
Command 4 (MI4)

02-05

Multi-Function Input
Command 5 (MI5)

02-06

Multi-Function Input
Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for
TRG)
Multi-Function Input
Command 7
Multi-Function Input
Command 8
Multi-Function Input
Command 9
Multi-Function Input
Command 10
Multi-Function Input
Command 11
Multi-Function Input
Command 12
Multi-Function Input
Command 13
Multi-Function Input
Command 14

02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30

Settings
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: 3-wire (momentary push button)
5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start
Lockout)
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
11: B.B. input

1

○
○
○

○

○

○

2

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

3

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

4
0
0

13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
19: Digital Up command
20: Digital Down command

43: Analog input resolution selection

○
○

○
○

○
○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

12: Output stop

21: PID function disabled
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input
command 6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input

4-6

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0
○ ○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○

○
○
○

○

○
○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Settings
44: Reset initial reel diameter

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○ ○
○
○
○

45: Reset initial reel diameter 0

○

○

○

○

○

46: Reset initial reel diameter 1

○

○

○

○

○

47: Reset PID control integration of tension

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

48: Mechanical gear ratio switch

○

49: Reserved
50: Reserved
02-07

UP/DOWN Key Mode

02-11

The
Acceleration/Deceleration
Speed of the UP/DOWN
Key with Constant Speed
Digital Input Response
Time
Digital Input Operation
Direction
Multi-function Output 1
RA, RB, RC(Relay1)

02-12

Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)

02-08
02-09
02-10

02-13

Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)

02-14

Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)

02-35

Multi-function Output 5
(MO3)

02-36

Multi-function Output 6
(MO4)

02-37

Multi-function Output 7
(MO5)

02-38

Multi-function Output 8
(MO6)

02-39

Multi-function Output 9
(MO7)

02-40

Multi-function Output 10
(MO8)

02-41

Multi-function Output 11
(MO9)

02-42

Multi-function Output 12
(MOA)

0: up/down by the accel/decel time
1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08)
0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms

0

○

○

○

○

0.01

○

○

○

○

0.001~ 30.000 sec

0.005

○

○

○

○

0 ~ 65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

0: No function
1: Operation indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
13: Overheat
14: Software brake signal
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)

11

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○

○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

42: Crane function

○

○

○

○

43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)

○

○

○

○

1
0

0

41: Multi-position attained

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

4-7

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Settings
44: Max. reel diameter attained

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○ ○
○
○
○

45: Empty reel diameter attained

○

○

○

○

○

46: Broken belt detection

○

○

○

○

○

47: Break release at stop

○

○

○

○

48: Error PID feedback of tension

○

○

○

○

○

49: Reserved
50: Reserved
02-15
02-16
02-17
02-18
02-19
02-20
02-21
02-22
02-31
02-32
02-33
02-34
02-43

4-8

Multi-output Direction

0 ~ 65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Terminal Count Value

0 ~ 65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

1

○

○

○

○

○

60.00/
50.00
2.00

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

60.00/
50.00
2.00

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

0.000

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Preliminary Counter
Value
Digital Output Gain
Desired Frequency
Attained 1
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency
Attained 2
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 2
Brake Delay Time
Output Current Level
Setting for External
Terminals
Output Boundary for
External Terminals
External Operation
Control Selection after
Reset
Zero-speed Level of
Motor

0 ~ 65535
1 ~ 40
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.000~65.000 Sec
0~100%
0.00~+-60.00Hz (it is motor speed when using PG)
0: Disable
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
0~65535 rpm

0.00

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
Pr.
03-00
03-01
03-02

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

3: Torque compensation command

○

○

○

○

4: PID target value (refer to group 8)

○

○

○

○

5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)

○

○

○

○

6: P.T.C. thermistor input value

○

○

○

○

Settings
0: No function

Analog Input 2 (ACI)

1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control
mode)
2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)

Analog Input 3 (AUI)

Factory
Setting
1

VF

Explanation
Analog Input 1 (AVI)

0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

○

7: Positive torque limit

○

8: Negative torque limit

○

9: Regenerative torque limit

○

10: Positive/negative torque limit

03-04
03-05
03-06
03-07
03-08
03-09
03-10
03-11
03-12
03-13
03-14
03-15
03-16
03-17

Analog Input Bias 1
(AVI)
Analog Input Bias 2
(ACI)
Analog Input Bias 3
(AUI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AVI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AUI)
Analog Input Gain 1
(AVI)
Analog Input Gain 2
(ACI )
Analog Input Gain 3
(AUI)
ACI/AVI2 Selection
Analog Input Delay
Time (AVI)
Analog Input Delay
Time (ACI)
Analog Input Delay
Time (AUI)
Addition Function of
the Analog Input
Loss of the ACI Signal

03-18

Analog Output
Selection 1

03-21

Analog Output
Selection 2

03-24

Analog Output
Selection 3

○

○

11: PID feedback signal of tension

○

○

○

○

○

12: Line speed

○

○

○

○

○

13: Reel diameter

○

○

○

○

○

14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop)

○

○

○

○

○

15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)

○

16: Zero-speed tension

○
○

17: Tension taper
03-03

○

-100.0~100.0%
-100.0~100.0%
-100.0~100.0%
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
0: ACI
1: AVI 2
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Stop immediately and display E.F.
0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0.01

○

○

○

○

○

0.01

○

○

○

○

○

0.01

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

4-9

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

03-19
03-20
03-22
03-23
03-25
03-26

4-10

Explanation

Analog Output Gain 1
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 1
Analog Output Gain 2
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 2
Analog Output Gain 3
Analog Output Value
in REV Direction 3

Settings
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: Pulse frequency command
0~200.0%
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
0~200.0%
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
0~200.0%
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction

Factory
Setting

VF

VFPG

SVC

100.0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Pr.
04-00
04-01
04-02
04-03
04-04
04-05
04-06
04-07
04-08
04-09
04-10
04-11
04-12
04-13
04-14
04-15
04-16
04-17
04-18
04-19
04-20
04-21
04-22
04-23
04-24
04-25
04-26
04-27
04-28
04-29

0.00~600.00Hz

Factory
Setting
0.00

0.00~600.00Hz

VF

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

○

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

Explanation

Settings

FOCPG TQRPG

1st Step Speed
Frequency
2nd Step Speed
Frequency
3rd Step Speed
Frequency
4th Step Speed
Frequency
5th Step Speed
Frequency
6th Step Speed
Frequency
7th Step Speed
Frequency
8th Step Speed
Frequency
9th Step Speed
Frequency
10th Step Speed
Frequency
11th Step Speed
Frequency
12th Step Speed
Frequency
13th Step Speed
Frequency
14th Step Speed
Frequency
15th Step Speed
Frequency
Multi-position 1

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 2

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 3

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 4

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 5

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 6

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 7

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 8

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 9

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 10

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 11

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 12

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 13

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 14

0~65535

0

○

○

Multi-position 15

0~65535

0

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

○

4-11

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 5 Motor Parameters
Pr.

Explanation

05-00

Motor Auto Tuning

05-01

Full-load Current of
Motor 1
Rated power of Motor 1

05-02
05-03
05-04
05-05
05-06
05-07
05-08
05-09
05-10
05-11
05-12
05-13
05-14
05-15
05-16
05-17
05-18
05-19
05-20
05-21
05-22

Settings
0: No function
1: Rolling test
2: Static Test
3: Reserved
40-100%

○

○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

#.###

○

○

○

#.###
#.#
#.#
1

○

○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

60.00

○

○

○

○

0: Disable
1: Enable

0

○

○

○

○

40-100%

#.##

○

○

○

○

○

0~655.35

#.##

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○

○

○

0~65.535Ω
0~65.535Ω
0~6553.5mH
0~6553.5mH
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz

Full-load Current of
Motor 2
Rated Power of Motor 2

0~65535

1710

2~20
0- factory setting of Pr.05-01

4
#.##

0~65.535Ω
0~65.535Ω
0~6553.5mH
0~6553.5mH
0.001~10.000sec

#.###
#.###
#.#
#.#
0.020
0.100

05-24

0~10

Slip Compensation Gain

0.00~10.00

Slip Deviation Level

0~1000% (0: disable)

Detection Time of Slip
Deviation

0.0~10.0 sec

05-29
05-30
05-31
05-32

4-12

Hunting Gain

○

○

4
#.##

0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
0~10000 (0: disable)

Delay Time for Y0~60.000 sec
connection/Δ −connection
Accumulative Motor
00~1439
Operation Time (Min.)
Accumulative Motor
00~65535
Operation Time (day)

○

○

○

0

○

0.00

○

○

○

○

1710

○

FOCPG TQRPG

○

0~65535
1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)
2~20
0-factory setting of Pr.05-01

Over Slip Treatment

○

○

0.001~10.000sec

05-28

SVC

○

Torque Compensation
Gain

05-27

VFPG

○

Rated speed of Motor 1
(rpm)
Number of Motor Poles 1
No-load Current of Motor
1
Rotor Resistance R1 of
Motor 1
Rr of Motor 1
Lm of Motor 1
Lx of Motor 1
Motor 1/Motor 2
Selection
Frequency for Yconnection/
Δ−connection Switch
Y-connection
/Δ−connection Switch

Rated Speed of Motor 2
(rpm)
Number of Motor Poles 2
No-load Current of Motor
2
Rs of Motor 2
Rr of Motor 2
Lm of Motor 2
Lx of Motor 2
Torque Compensation
Time Constant

VF

○

#.##

Slip Compensation Time
Constant

05-26

#.##

0~655.35

05-23

05-25

Factory
Setting
0

○
○

0

○

○

○

1.0

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

2000

○

○

○

0.200

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 6 Protection Parameters
Pr.
06-00
06-01

06-02
06-03
06-04
06-05

06-06

06-07
06-08
06-09

06-10
06-11
06-12

Explanation
Low Voltage Level
Over-voltage Stall
Prevention
Phase-loss Protection
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Acceleration
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Operation
Accel./Decel. Time
Selection of Stall
Prevention at constant
speed

Settings
160.0~220.0Vdc
320.0~440.0Vdc
0.0: Disable
350.0~450.0Vdc
700.0~900.0Vdc
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
00~250%
00~250%

0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel time
Over-torque Detection 0: disable
Selection (OT1)
1: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection 10~250%
Level (OT1)
Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec
Time (OT1)
Over-torque Detection 0: disable
Selection (OT2)
1: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection 10~250%
Level (OT2)
Over-torque Detection 0.0~60.0 sec
Time (OT2)
Current Limit
0~250%

Factory
Setting
180.0
360.0

VF

VFPG

SVC

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

380.0
760.0
0

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

170

○

○

○

170

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

150

○

○

○

○

○

0.1

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

150

○

○

○

○

○

0.1

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

150

FOCPG TQRPG

Electronic Thermal
Relay Selection (Motor
1)
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for
Motor 1
Heat Sink Over-heat
(OH) Warning
Stall Prevention Limit
Level

0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
30.0~600.0 sec

2

○

○

○

○

○

60.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~110.0 °C

85.0

○

○

○

○

○

0~100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)

50

○

○

○

06-17

Present Fault Record

0

06-18

Second Most Recent
Fault Record

06-19

Third Most Recent
Fault Record

0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

06-13
06-14
06-15
06-16

06-20

Fourth Most Recent
Fault Record

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

0

0

0

4-13

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
06-21

06-22

06-23
06-24
06-25
06-26
06-27

4-14

Explanation

Settings

Factory
Setting

VF

VFPG

SVC

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○

Fault Output Option 1

11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)
0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)

Fault Output Option 2

0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)

0

○

○

○

○

○

Fault Output Option 3

0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)

0

○

○

○

○

○

Fault Output Option 4

0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)

0

○

○

○

○

○

2

○

○

○

○

○

Fifth Most Recent
Fault Record

Sixth Most Recent
Fault Record

Electronic Thermal
0: Inverter motor
Relay Selection (Motor 1: Standard motor
2)
2: Disable

0

0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
06-28
06-29

06-30
06-31
06-32
06-33
06-34
06-35
06-36

Factory
Setting
60.0

VF

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~100.0%

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00~10.00sec

0.20

○

○

○

○

○

0.00~655.35 Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~6553.5 V

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~6553.5 V

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00~655.35 Amp

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~6553.5 °C

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

Explanation

Settings

Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for
Motor 2
PTC (Positive
Temperature
Coefficient) Detection
Selection
PTC Level

30.0~600.0 sec

Filter Time for PTC
Detection
Output Frequency for
Malfunction
Output AC Voltage for
Malfunction
DC Voltage for
Malfunction
Current Value for
Malfunction
IGBT Temperature for
Malfunction

0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

4-15

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 7 Special Parameters
Pr.
07-00
07-01
07-02
07-03
07-04
07-05
07-06

07-07
07-08
07-09
07-10
07-11
07-12

07-13

07-14
07-15
07-16
07-17
07-18
07-19

07-20
07-21
07-22
07-23
07-24
07-25
07-26

4-16

Explanation
Software Brake Level

Factory
Setting
380.0
760.0
0

Settings
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc
0~100%

DC Brake Current
Level
DC Brake Time during 0.0~60.0 sec
Start-up
DC Brake Time during 0.0~60.0 sec
Stopping
Start-point for DC
0.00~600.00Hz
Brake

VF

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

FOCPG TQRPG
○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

0.0

○

○

0.00

○

○

○

DC Brake Voltage
Gain

1~500

50

○

○

○

Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection

0: Operation stop after momentary power loss
1: Operation continues after momentary power loss,
speed search starts with the Master Frequency
reference value
2: Operation continues after momentary power loss,
speed search starts with the minimum frequency
0.1~5.0 sec

0

○

○

○

○

○

2.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.1~5.0 sec

0.5

○

○

○

○

○

20~200%

150

○

○

○

○

○

0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with last frequency command
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
0~10

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

DEB Return Time

0: Disable
1: Speed search from maximum frequency
2: Speed search from start-up frequency
3: Speed search from minimum frequency
0: Disable
st
1: 1 decel. time
nd
2: 2 decel. time
rd
3: 3 decel. time
th
4: 4 decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. Time
0.0~25.0 sec

0.0

○

○

○

○

Dwell Time at Accel.

0.00~600.00sec

0.00

○

○

○

○

Dwell Frequency at
Accel.
Dwell Time at Decel.

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00sec

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
B.B. Time for Speed
Search
Current Limit for
Speed Search
Base-block Speed
Search
Auto Restart after
Fault
Speed Search during
Start-up
Decel. Time Selection
for Momentary Power
Loss

Dwell Frequency at
Decel.
Fan Control

Torque Command
Torque Command
Source
Maximum Torque
Command
Filter Time of Torque
Command
Speed Limit Selection
Torque Mode +Speed
Limit
Torque Mode-Speed
Limit

0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive
stops and fan OFF
3: Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink
temperature attained
4: Fan always OFF
-100.0~100.0% (Pr. 07-22 setting=100%)
0: Digital keypad
1: RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
0~500%
0.000~1.000 sec

○

○

0.0

○

0

○

100

○

0.000

○

0: By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26
1: Frequency command source (Pr.00-20)
0~120%

0

○

10

○

0~120%

10

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
07-27

07-28
07-29
07-30
07-31
07-32
07-33
07-34
07-35
07-36

Explanation
Source of Torque
Offset

Settings

Factory
Setting
0

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Torque Offset Setting

0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.0731)
0.0~100.0%

0.0

○

○

○

High Torque Offset

0.0~100.0%

30.0

○

○

○

Middle Torque Offset

0.0~100.0%

20.0

○

○

○

Low Torque Offset

0.0~100.0%

10.0

○

○

○

Forward Motor Torque
Limit
Forward Regenerative
Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque
Limit
Reverse Regenerative
Torque Limit
Emergency Stop (EF)
& Forced Stop
Selection

0~500%

200

○

○

0~500%

200

○

○

0~500%

200

○

○

0~500%

200

○

○

○

○

0: Coast stop
1: By deceleration Time 1
2: By deceleration Time 2
3: By deceleration Time 3
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

4-17

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
Pr.

Explanation

Input Terminal for PID
08-00 Feedback

Settings
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)

Factory
Setting

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

0

○

○

○

○

08-01 Proportional Gain (P)

0.0~500.0%

80.0

○

○

○

○

08-02 Integral Gain (I)

0.00~100.00 sec

1.00

○

○

○

○

08-03 Derivative Control (D)
Upper limit for Integral
08-04 Control
PID Output Frequency
08-05 Limit

0.00~1.00 sec

0.00

○

○

○

○

0.0~100.0%

100.0

○

○

○

○

0.0~110.0%

100.0

○

○

○

○

08-06 PID Offset

-100.0~+100.0%

0.0

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0.0~2.5 sec
08-07 PID Delay Time
Feedback Signal Detection
0.0~3600.0 sec
08-08 Time
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
08-09 Feedback Fault Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and keep at last frequency
08-10 Sleep Frequency

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

08-11 Wake-up Frequency

0.00~600.00Hz

0.00

○

○

○

○

08-12 Sleep Time

0.0~6000.0 sec

0.0

○

○

○

○

08-13 PID Deviation Level

1.0~50.0%

10.0

○

○

○

○

0.1~300.0 sec

5.0

○

○

○

○

0.1~300.0 sec

5.0

○

○

○

○

0

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

08-14 PID Deviation Time
Filter Time for PID
08-15 Feedback
08-16
|
Reserved
08-20
Tension Control Selection
08-21

0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
2: Line speed, speed mode

TQRPG

3: Reserved
4: Open-loop, torque mode
08-22
08-23
08-24
08-25

08-26
08-27
08-28

08-29
08-30
08-31

4-18

Wind Mode

○
0

○

○

○

○

○

Mechanical Gear Ratio A

0: Rewind
1: Unwind
1-65535

100

○

○

○

○

○

Mechanical Gear Ratio B

1-65535

100

○

○

○

○

○

Source of the Tension
Command/Line Speed

0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)
1: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID target
value of tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
0.0~100.0%

0

○

○

○

○

○

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

PID Target Value of
Tension/Line Speed
Source of Tension/Line
Speed PID Feedback

Tension PID P1

0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID
feedback of tension)
1: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
0: Disable
1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08-44,
08-32~08-34 corresponds to 08-43)
2: Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07, 0832~08-34 corresponds to 01-00)
0.0~1000.0

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

Tension PID I1

0.00~500.00 sec

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

Auto-tuning Tension PID

Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
08-32
08-33
08-34
08-35
08-36
08-37

08-38
08-39
08-40
08-41
08-42

08-43
08-44
08-45
08-46
08-47
08-48
08-49
08-50
08-51
08-52
08-53
08-54
08-55

08-56
08-57
08-58
08-59
08-60
08-61
08-62
08-63
08-64

Explanation

Settings

Tension PID P2

0.0~1000.0

Tension PID I2

0.00~500.00 sec

Factory
Setting
50.0

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

TQRPG

○

○

○

○

○

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

Reserved
PID/Line Speed Output
Status
Tension/Line Speed PID
Output Limit
Source of Line Speed
Input Command

0: Positive output
1: Negative output
0~100.00% (according to Pr,01-00)

0

○

○

○

○

○

20.00

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Max. Line Speed

0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)
2: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
3: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)
0.0~3000.0m/min

1000.0

○

○

○

○

○

Min. Line Speed

0.0~3000.0m/min

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

Pulse Number for Each
Meter
Current Line Speed

0.0~6000.0

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~3000.0m/min

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Source of Reel Diameter

0: Calculated by line speed
1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on
reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15)
2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on
motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01)
3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to
13)

Max. Reel Diameter

1.0~6000.0mm

6000.0

○

○

○

○

○

Empty Reel Diameter

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Source of Initial Reel
Diameter
Initial Reel Diameter

0: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)
1.0~6000.0mm

0

○

○

○

○

○

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Initial Reel Diameter 1

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Initial Reel Diameter 2

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Number of Pulse per
Revolution
Coil Number for Each
Layer
Material Thickness

1~10000ppr

1

○

○

○

○

○

0.001~60.000mm

1.000

○

○

○

○

○

0.001~60.000mm

1.000

○

○

○

○

○

Filter Time of Reel
Diameter
Auto Compensation of
Reel Diameter
Current Reel Diameter

0.00 to 100.00 seconds

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

0: Disable
1: Enable
1.0~6000.0mm

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

Smart Start

Switch Level for Smart
Start and PID function
Frequency for Smart Start

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

1

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)

15.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

2.00

○

○

○

○

○

3.00

○

○

○

○

0: Disable
1: Enable
2: In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction

Accel. Time for Smart Start 0.01~600.00 seconds
Broken Belt Detection
Min. Line Speed of Broken
Belt Detection
Allowance Error of Line
Speed of Broken Belt
Detection
Detection Time of Broken
Belt
Allowance Error Level of
Tension/Line Speed PID
Feedback
Allowance Error Detection
Time of Tension PID
Feedback

0: Disable
1: Enable
0.0~3000.0m/min

0

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

1.0~6000.0mm

100.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~100.00 sec

1.00

○

○

○

○

0~100%

100

○

○

○

○

0.0~10.0 sec

0.5

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-19

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
08-65
08-66
08-67
08-68
08-69

Explanation

DFM Selection

08-70

Low-pass Filter Time of
Line Speed

08-71
|
08-75

Reserved

08-76
08-77
08-78
08-79

08-80
08-81
08-82
08-83
08-84
08-85
08-86

Settings

Error Treatment of Tension 0: Warn and keep operation
PID Feedback
1: Warn and coast to stop
2: Warn and ramp to stop
Upper Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0%
Feedback
Lower Limit of Tension PID 0.0~100.0%
Feedback
Reserved

Source of Tension Setting

0: Output frequency
1: Frequency command
0.00~100.00 sec

Factory
Setting
0

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

○

○

○

○

TQRPG

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

Max. Tension

0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension
setting) (Pr.08-78)
0~30000 N

0

○

Tension Setting

0~30000 N

0

○

Source of Zero-speed
Tension Setting

0: Disable
1: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zerospeed tension) (Pr.08-80)
0~30000 N

0

○

0

○

0

○

Tension Taper

0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension
taper)(Pr.08-82)
0~100%

0

○

Friction Compensation

0.0~100.0%

0.0

○

Compensation Coefficient
of Material Inertial
Torque Feedforward Gain

0~30000

Low Pass Filter Time of
Torque Feedforward

Setting of Zero-speed
Tension
Source of Tension Taper

0

○

0.0~100.0%

50.0

○

0.00~100.00

5.00

○

08-87
|

Reserved

08-99

4-20

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 9 Communication Parameters
Pr.
09-00
09-01
09-02

09-03
09-04

09-05
09-06

09-07
09-08

Explanation
Communication
Address
COM1 Transmission
Speed
COM1 Transmission
Fault Treatment

Settings
1~254
4.8~115.2Kbps
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and keep operation
0.0~100.0 sec

COM1 Time-out
Detection
COM1 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII)
Protocol
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
COM2 Transmission
4.8~115.2Kbps
Speed (Keypad)
COM2 Transmission
0: Warn and keep operation
Fault Treatment
1: Warn and ramp to stop
(Keypad)
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and keep operation
COM2 Time-out
0.0~100.0 sec
Detection (Keypad)
COM2 Communication 0: 7N1 (ASCII)
Protocol (Keypad)
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)

09-17
09-18
09-19

○

○

9.6

○

○

○

○

○

3

○

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

1

○

○

○

○

○

9.6

○

○

○

○

○

3

○

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

13

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 3

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 4

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 5

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 6

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 7

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 8

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 9

0~65535

0

○

○

○

○

○

Block Transfer 2

09-16

FOCPG TQRPG

○

Block Transfer 1

09-15

○

○

0.00~600.00Hz

09-14

SVC

○

○

Transmission Master
Frequency

09-13

VFPG

○

2.0

Response Delay Time 0.0~200.0ms

09-10

09-12

VF

60.00

09-09

09-11

Factory
Setting
1

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-21

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
09-20
09-21
09-22
09-23

4-22

Explanation

Settings

Block Transfer 10

0~65535

Multi-function Output
Status
AFM2 Status

0~65535

AFM3 Status

0~4095

0~4095

Factory
Setting
0
Readonly
Readonly
Readonly

VF

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

FOCPG TQRPG
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Pr.
10-00
10-01

10-02
10-03
10-04
10-05
10-06
10-07
10-08
10-09
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15

10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20

Explanation

Settings

Encoder Pulse
Encoder Input Type
Setting

1~20000
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
PG Feedback Fault
0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Detection Time for PG 0.00~10.0 sec
Feedback Fault
ASR (Auto Speed
0~40
Regulation) Control
( P) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
0.000~10.000 sec
Regulation) Control (I)
1
ASR (Auto Speed
0~40
Regulation) Control
( P) 2
ASR (Auto Speed
0.000~10.000 sec
Regulation) Control (I)
2
ASR 1/ASR2 Switch
5.00~600.00Hz
Frequency
ASR Primary Low
Pass Filter Gain

0.000~0.350 sec

Factory
Setting
600
0

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

○
○

○
○

○
○

2

○

○

○

1.0

○

○

○

10

○

○

0.100

○

○

10

○

○

0.100

○

○

7.00

○

○

0.008

○

PG Stall Level

0~120% (0: disable)

115

○

○

PG Stall Detection
Time

0.0~2.0 sec

0.1

○

○

PG Slip Range

0~50% (0: disable)

50

○

○

PG Slip Detection
Time

0.0~10.0 sec

0.5

○

○

2

○

○

PG Stall and Slip Error 0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Pulse Input Type
0: Disable
Setting
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
Output Setting for
1~255
Frequency Division
(denominator)
PG Electrical Gear A
1~5000
(Channel 1 of PG
card)
PG Electrical Gear B
1~5000
(Channel 2 of PG
card)
PG Position Control
0~20000
Point (Home)
Range for PG Position 0~20000
Attained (Home range)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

1

○

○

100

○

○

100

○

○

0

○

○

10

○

○

4-23

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Settings

10-21

P Gain of Zero Speed

0~40

10-22

I Gain of Zero Speed

0.000~10.000 sec

Feed Forward Gain of
APR
Decelerate Time of
Position
Max. Frequency for
Resolution Switch
Reserved
PG Mechanical Gear
A1
PG Mechanical Gear
B1
PG Mechanical Gear
A2
PG Mechanical Gear
B2

0~100

10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30

4-24

0.00~600.00 sec/00~6000.0 sec
50.00~600.00Hz

Factory
Setting
10
0.100

VF

○

30
3.00
3.0
50.00

VFPG

SVC

○

○

○

○

○

○
○

FOCPG TQRPG

○

○

○

○
○

○

○

1~65535

100

○

○

○

1~65535

100

○

○

○

1~65535

100

○

○

○

1~65535

100

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 11 Advanced Parameters
Pr.

11-00

11-01
11-02
11-03
11-04
11-05
11-06
11-07
11-08
11-09

Explanation

System Control
Per Unit of System
Inertia
Low-speed Bandwidth
High-speed Bandwidth
PDFF Gain Value
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux
Weakening Curve for
Motor 2
Detection Time for
Phase-loss
Reserved

Settings
bit 0: ASR Auto tuning
bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
bit 2: Zero Servo
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4: Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP
1~65535 (256=1PU)

Factory
Setting
0

VF

VFPG

SVC

○

400

0~40Hz
0~40Hz
0~200%
0~200%

10
10
30
90

0~200%

90

FOCPG TQRPG

○
○

○

○

○
○
○
○

○
○

○

○

0.01~600.00 sec

0.20

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~320.0
0~100%

60.0
0

○

○

○

○
○

○

0~40Hz
0: Disable
0~150%
0~20db

10
65

○
○

○

11-12

Level of Phase-loss
Speed Feed Forward
Gain
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Speed Response of
Flux Weakening Area

11-13

Notch Filter Depth

11-14

Notch Filter Frequency 0.00~200.00

0.00

11-15

Gain Value of Slip
Compensation

0.00~1.00

1.00

11-16

Low-pass Filter Time
of Keypad Display

0.001~65.535sec

0.100

○

○

○

○

11-17

Low-pass Filter Time
of PG2 Pulse Input

0.000~65.535sec

0.100

○

○

○

○

11-18

APR Gain

0.00~40.00

10.00

○

11-19

APR Curve Time

0.00~655.35 sec

3.00

○

0~65535 (hour)

0

11-10
11-11

11-20
|
11-28

Reserved

11-29

Accumulative
Operation Time of
Phase-loss

11-30
|
11-40

Reserved

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

○

0

○
○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

4-25

Chapter 4 Parameters|

4.2 Version Differences
4.2.1 Version 2.02
New or update parameter groups are:
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters

4.2.2 Version 2.04
New or update parameter groups are:
Group 0 System Parameters
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 5: Motor Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 8: High-function PID Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters

Version 2.02
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
New settings are marked in bold. In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-34.
Pr.
02-01

Explanation

02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26

Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3-wire operation)
Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4)
Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5)
Multi-Function Input Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for TRG)
Multi-Function Input Command 7
Multi-Function Input Command 8
Multi-Function Input Command 9
Multi-Function Input Command 10

02-27

Multi-Function Input Command 11

02-28
02-29
02-30

Multi-Function Input Command 12
Multi-Function Input Command 13
Multi-Function Input Command 14

02-02
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06

02-11
02-12
02-13
02-14

4-26

Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB,
RC(Relay1)
Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○
○

Settings
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)

○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○

○

33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable position learning function
(valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input
command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33

○

○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○

○

30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33

32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)

○

○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

31: Y-connection for the motor coil

○

○

○

○

32: Δ connection for the motor coil

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
02-35
02-36
02-37
02-38
02-39
02-40
02-41
02-42

Explanation
Multi-function Output 5 (MO3)

Settings

Multi-function Output 7 (MO5)

33: Zero speed (actual output
frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output
frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)

Multi-function Output 8 (MO6)

Multi-function Output 6 (MO4)

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○ ○
○
○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)

○

○

○

○

○

Multi-function Output 9 (MO7)

37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)

○

○

○

○

○

Multi-function Output 10 (MO8)

38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)

○

○

○

○

○

Multi-function Output 11 (MO9)

39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)

Multi-function Output 12 (MOA)

40: Speed attained (including zero
speed)

○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○

41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function

○

Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-20. The settings for Pr.03-00 to
Pr.03-02 are from 0 to 10
Pr.
03-00

03-01

03-02

Explanation

Settings

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0
○

Analog Input 1 (AVI)

2: torque command (torque limit under
speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command

○

○

○

○

Analog Input 2 (ACI)

4: PID target value (refer to group 8)

○

○

○

○

5: PID feedback signal (refer to group
8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value

○

○

○

○

Analog Input 3 (AUI)

○

○

○

○

7: Positive torque limit

○

8: Negative torque limit

○

9: Regenerative torque limit

○

10: Positive/negative torque limit
03-20

Analog Output Value in REV Direction

0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV
direction

○

○

○
0

○

○

○

○

○

Group 6 Protection Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.06-00 to Pr.06-31. The settings of Pr.06-01 are
shown as follows. The settings for Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22 are from 0 to 62.
Pr.
06-01
06-17
06-18
06-19
06-20
06-21
06-22

Explanation
Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Present Fault Record
Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Settings
0.0: Disable
350.0~450.0Vdc
700.0~900.0Vdc
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration
(ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration
(ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed
(ocn)

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
380.0
760.0
0
0
0
0
0
0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

4-27

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting

Settings
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration
(ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration
(ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed
(ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration
(LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration
(Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed
(Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)

06-31

Filter Time for PTC Detection

17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP
above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Insufficient torque 1
29: Insufficient torque 2
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error
(cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error
(cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error
(cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Software error (ccodE)
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch
error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
0.00~10.00sec

0.20

○

○

○

○

○

Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
4-28

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.08-00 to Pr.08-15.
Pr.
08-15

Explanation

Settings

Filter Time for PID Feedback

0.1~300.0 sec

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
5.0
○ ○
○
○

Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.10-00 to Pr.10-28.
Pr.
10-28

Explanation

Settings

PG Mechanical Gear B1

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting

1~5000

100

○

○

○

Group 11 Advanced Parameters
In version 2.02, the parameters are from Pr.11-00 to Pr.11-30.
Pr.
11-09
11-10
11-18
|
11-28
11-29
11-30

Explanation

Settings
0.0~320.0

Level of Phase-loss
Reserved

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
60.0 ○ ○
○
○
○

Reserved
Accumulative Operation Time of Phaseloss

0~65535 (hour)

0

APR Curve Time

0.00~655.35 sec

3.00

○

○

○

○

○

○

Version 2.04
Group 0 System Parameters
Pr.

00-03

00-04

Explanation
Start-up Display Selection

Content of Multi Function
Display

Settings
0: Display the frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
2: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)
3: Display the output current (A)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (C)
2: Display output frequency (H)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage ( u )
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Output power factor angle (n)
6: Display output power (kW)
7: Display actual motor speed (HU)
8: Display estimate output torque (kg-m)
9: Display PG position (G) (refer to Pr.10-00 and Pr.1001)
10: Display PID feedback
11: Display AVI (%)
12: Display ACI (%)
13: Display AUI (%)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
15: Display the temperature of IGBT (°C)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF)
18: Multi-step speed
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output
21: Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG
card)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card)

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0
○ ○
○
○
○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-29

Chapter 4 Parameters|

New settings 44~50 for Pr.02-00~Pr.02-06 and new parameter 02-43.
Pr.

Explanation

02-00

2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control

02-01

Multi-Function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3wire operation)

02-02
Multi-Function Input
Command 2 (MI2)
02-03

Multi-Function Input
Command 3 (MI3)

02-04

Multi-Function Input
Command 4 (MI4)

02-05

Multi-Function Input
Command 5 (MI5)

02-06

Multi-Function Input
Command 6 (MI6)
(specific terminal for
TRG)
Multi-Function Input
Command 7
Multi-Function Input
Command 8
Multi-Function Input
Command 9
Multi-Function Input
Command 10
Multi-Function Input
Command 11
Multi-Function Input
Command 12
Multi-Function Input
Command 13
Multi-Function Input
Command 14

02-23
02-24
02-25
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30

Settings
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: 3-wire (momentary push button)
5: 3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start
Lockout)
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
11: B.B. input

1

○
○
○

○

○

○

2

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

3

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

4
0
0

12: Output stop
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
19: Digital Up command
20: Digital Down command
21: PID function disabled
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input
command 6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ−connection
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection

4-30

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0
○ ○
○
○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○

○
○
○
○

○

○

○
○
○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Settings
44: Reset initial reel diameter

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○ ○
○
○
○

45: Reset initial reel diameter 0

○

○

○

○

○

46: Reset initial reel diameter 1

○

○

○

○

○

47: Reset PID control integration of tension

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

48: Mechanical gear ratio switch

○

49: Reserved
50: Reserved
02-11

Multi-function Output 1
RA, RB, RC(Relay1)

02-12

Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)

02-13

Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)

02-14

Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)

02-35

Multi-function Output 5
(MO3)

02-36

Multi-function Output 6
(MO4)

02-37

Multi-function Output 7
(MO5)

02-38

Multi-function Output 8
(MO6)

02-39

Multi-function Output 9
(MO7)

02-40

Multi-function Output
10 (MO8)

02-41

Multi-function Output
11 (MO9)

02-42

Multi-function Output
12 (MOA)

0: No function
1: Operation indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
13: Overheat
14: Software brake signal
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
31: Y-connection for the motor coil

11

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

○

42: Crane function

○

○

○

○

43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)

○

○

○

○

44: Max. reel diameter attained

○

○

○

○

○

45: Empty reel diameter attained

○

○

○

○

○

46: Broken belt detection

○

○

○

○

○

47: Break release at stop

○

○

○

○

48: Error PID feedback of tension

○

○

○

○

32: Δ connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)

1
0
0

0

41: Multi-position attained

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○

49: Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-31

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

Explanation

Settings

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting

50: Reserved
02-43

Zero-speed Level of
Motor

0

0~65535 rpm

○

○

○

○

○

Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
New settings 11~16 for Pr.03-00~Pr.03-02 and new parameters 03-21~03-26.
Pr.
03-00
03-01
03-02

Explanation

Settings

Analog Input 1 (AVI)

0: No function

Analog Input 2 (ACI)

1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR
control mode)
2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)

Analog Input 3 (AUI)

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
1
○ ○
○
○
○
0

○

○

○

○

3: Torque compensation command

○

○

○

○

4: PID target value (refer to group 8)

○

○

○

○

5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)

○

○

○

○

6: P.T.C. thermistor input value

○

○

○

○

0

○

7: Positive torque limit

○

8: Negative torque limit

○

9: Regenerative torque limit

○

10: Positive/negative torque limit

03-21
03-24

03-22
03-23
03-25
03-26

4-32

○

○

○

11: PID feedback signal of tension

○

○

○

○

○

12: Line speed

○

○

○

○

○

13: Reel diameter

○

○

○

○

○

14: PID target value of tension (tension closedloop)

○

○

○

○

○

15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)

○

16: Zero-speed tension

○
○

17: Tension taper
03-18

○

Analog Output Selection 0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
Analog Output
2: Motor speed (Hz)
Selection 2
3: Output current (rms)
Analog Output
4: Output voltage
Selection 3
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: Pulse frequency command
Analog Output Gain 2 0~200.0%
Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction
REV Direction 2
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
Analog Output Gain 3 0~200.0%
Analog Output Value in 0: Absolute value in REV direction
REV Direction 3
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction

0

100.0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

0

○

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 5 Motor Parameters
Pr.

Explanation

05-00

Motor Auto Tuning

05-01

Full-load Current of
Motor 1
Rated power of Motor 1

05-02
05-03

Settings
0: No function
1: Rolling test
2: Static Test
3: Reserved
40-100%

Factory
Setting
0

#.##

0~655.35

VF

VFPG

○

○

○

#.##

Rated speed of Motor 1 0~65535
(rpm)
1710 (60Hz, 4 poles), 1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)

SVC

1710

○

FOCPG TQRPG
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Group 6 Protection Parameters
New setting 0 for Pr.06-01, new settings 64~65 for Pr.06-17~Pr.06-22 and new parameters 0632~06-36.
Pr.
06-01
06-17
06-18

06-19
06-20

06-21

06-22

Explanation

Settings

0.0: Disable
350.0~450.0Vdc
700.0~900.0Vdc
Present Fault Record
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
Second Most Recent
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
Fault Record
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
Third Most Recent Fault 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
Record
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
Fourth Most Recent
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
Fault Record
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
Fifth Most Recent Fault 12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
Record
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)

Over-voltage Stall
Prevention

Sixth Most Recent Fault
Record

17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
380.0
760.0
0
0

0

0

0

0

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

4-33

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

06-32
06-33
06-34
06-35
06-36

Explanation

Output Frequency for
Malfunction
Output AC Voltage for
Malfunction
DC Voltage for
Malfunction
Current Value for
Malfunction
IGBT Temperature for
Malfunction

Settings
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)
0.00~655.35 Hz

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
○ ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
○ ○
○
○
○
0.00
○ ○
○
○
○

0.0~6553.5 V

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~6553.5 V

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00~655.35 Amp

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~6553.5 °C

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
New parameters 08-21~08-99
Pr.
08-00

08-01
08-21

Explanation
Input Terminal for PID
Feedback

Proportional Gain (P)
Tension Control
Selection

Settings
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15,
skip direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15,
skip direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
0.0~500.0%
0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
2: Line speed, speed mode

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0

○

○

○

○

80.0

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

3: Reserved
4: Open-loop, torque mode

4-34

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.
08-22
08-23
08-24
08-25

08-26
08-27
08-28

08-29
08-30
08-31
08-32
08-33
08-34
08-35
08-36
08-37

08-38
08-39
08-40
08-41
08-42

08-43
08-44
08-45
08-46
08-47
08-48
08-49
08-50
08-51
08-52
08-53

Explanation
Wind Mode
Mechanical Gear Ratio
A
Mechanical Gear Ratio
B
Source of the Tension
Command/Line Speed

Settings
0: Rewind
1: Unwind
1-65535
1-65535
0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)
1: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID
target value of tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12
line speed)
0.0~100.0%

PID Target Value of
Tension/Line Speed
Source of Tension/Line 0: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID
Speed PID Feedback
feedback of tension)
1: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
Auto-tuning Tension
0: Disable
PID
1: Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 0844, 08-32~08-34 corresponds to 08-43)
2: Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07,
08-32~08-34 corresponds to 01-00)
Tension PID P1
0.0~1000.0
Tension PID I1

0.00~500.00 sec

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
0

○

○

○

○

○

100

○

○

○

○

○

100

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

Reserved
Tension PID P2

0.0~1000.0

50.0

○

○

○

○

○

Tension PID I2

0.00~500.00 sec

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

0: Positive output
1: Negative output
0~100.00% (according to Pr,01-00)

0

○

○

○

○

○

20.00

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

Reserved
PID/Line Speed Output
Status
Tension/Line Speed PID
Output Limit
Source of Line Speed
Input Command

Max. Line Speed

0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line
speed)
2: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
3: Pulse input (Pr.08-40)
4: DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)
0.0~3000.0m/min

1000.0

○

○

○

○

○

Min. Line Speed

0.0~3000.0m/min

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

Pulse Number for Each
Meter
Current Line Speed

0.0~6000.0

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0~3000.0m/min

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

Source of Reel
Diameter

0

○

○

○

○

○

Max. Reel Diameter

0: Calculated by line speed
1: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder
is on reel shaft)(Pr.08-49~51, Pr.10-15)
2: Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder
is on motor)(Pr.08-23~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 1000~10-01)
3: Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is
set to 13)
1.0~6000.0mm

6000.0

○

○

○

○

○

Empty Reel Diameter

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Source of Initial Reel
Diameter
Initial Reel Diameter

0: RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)
1.0~6000.0mm

0

○

○

○

○

○

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Initial Reel Diameter 1

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Initial Reel Diameter 2

1.0~6000.0mm

1.0

○

○

○

○

○

Number of Pulse per
Revolution
Coil Number for Each
Layer
Material Thickness

1~10000ppr

1

○

○

○

○

○

0.001~60.000mm

1.000

○

○

○

○

○

0.001~60.000mm

1.000

○

○

○

○

○

Filter Time of Reel
Diameter
Auto Compensation of

0.00 to 100.00 seconds

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

0: Disable

1.00

○

○

○

○

○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-35

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.

08-54
08-55
08-56
08-57
08-58
08-59
08-60
08-61
08-62
08-63
08-64
08-65
08-66
08-67
08-68
08-69
08-70

Explanation
1: Enable
1.0~6000.0mm

Smart Start

0: Disable
1: Enable
2: In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction
0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.01~600.00 seconds
0: Disable
1: Enable
0.0~3000.0m/min
1.0~6000.0mm

Switch Level for Smart
Start and PID function
Frequency for Smart
Start
Accel. Time for Smart
Start
Broken Belt Detection
Min. Line Speed of
Broken Belt Detection
Allowance Error of Line
Speed of Broken Belt
Detection
Detection Time of
Broken Belt
Allowance Error Level
of Tension/Line Speed
PID Feedback
Allowance Error
Detection Time of
Tension PID Feedback
Error Treatment of
Tension PID Feedback
Upper Limit of Tension
PID Feedback
Lower Limit of Tension
PID Feedback
Reserved

08-76

Source of Tension
Setting

08-78
08-79

08-80
08-81
08-82
08-83
08-84
08-85
08-86

○

○

○

○

○

1

○

○

○

○

○

15.0

○

○

○

○

○

2.00

○

○

○

○

○

3.00

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

0.00~100.00 sec

1.00

○

○

○

○

0~100%

100

○

○

○

○

0.0~10.0 sec

0.5

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

100.0

○

○

○

○

○

0.0

○

○

○

○

○

0

○

○

○

○

○

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and coast to stop
2: Warn and ramp to stop
0.0~100.0%
0.0~100.0%

0: Output frequency
1: Frequency command
Low-pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00 sec
Line Speed
Reserved

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
1.0

DFM Selection

08-71
|
08-75

08-77

Settings

Reel Diameter
Current Reel Diameter

0

○

Max. Tension

0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15
tension setting) (Pr.08-78)
0~30000 N

0

○

Tension Setting

0~30000 N

0

○

Source of Zero-speed
Tension Setting

0: Disable
1: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)
2: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zerospeed tension) (Pr.08-80)
0~30000 N

0

○

0

○

0

○

Tension Taper

0: Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)
1: Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17
tension taper)(Pr.08-82)
0~100%

Friction Compensation

0.0~100.0%

Setting of Zero-speed
Tension
Source of Tension
Taper

Compensation
0~30000
Coefficient of Material
Inertial
Torque Feed Forward
0.0~100.0%
Gain
Low Pass Filter Time of 0.00~100.00
Torque Feed Forward

0

○

0.0

○

0

○

50.0

○

5.00

○

08-87
|

Reserved

08-99

4-36

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 9 Communication Parameters
Pr.
09-21
09-22
09-23

Explanation

Settings

Multi-function Output
Status
AFM2 Status

0~65535

AFM3 Status

0~4095

0~4095

Factory
Setting
Readonly
Readonly
Readonly

VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
New parameters 10-29~10-30
Pr.
10-04
10-06
10-21
10-29
10-30

Explanation

Settings

0~40
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control ( P) 1
0~40
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control ( P) 2
0~40
P Gain of Zero Speed

Factory
VF VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
Setting
10
○
○
10

○

10

○

○

PG Mechanical Gear A2 1~5000

100

○

○

○

PG Mechanical Gear B2 1~5000

100

○

○

○

○

Group 11 Advanced Parameters
Updated parameters 11-00 and 11-09~11-10 and new parameters 11-18~11-40.
Pr.

11-00

11-07
11-08
11-09
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13

Explanation

System Control
Detection Time for
Phase-loss
Reserved
Level of Phase-loss
Speed Feed Forward
Gain

Settings
bit 0: ASR Auto tuning
bit 1: Inertia estimate
bit 2: Zero Servo
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4: Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP
0.01~600.00 sec

0.0~320.0
0~100%

Zero-speed
0~40Hz
Bandwidth
Speed Response of
0: Disable
Flux Weakening Area 0~150%
0~20db
Notch Filter Depth

Factory
Setting
0

VF

VFPG SVC FOCPG TQRPG
○

0.20

○

○

○

○

○

60.0
0

○

○

○

○
○

○

○

○

10

○

65

○

0

○

0.00~200.00

0.00

○

0.00~1.00

1.00

11-15

Notch Filter
Frequency
Gain Value of Slip
Compensation

11-16

Low-pass Filter Time
0.001~65.535sec
of Keypad Display

0.100

○

○

○

○

11-17

Low-pass Filter Time
0.000~65.535sec
of PG2 Pulse Input

0.100

○

○

○

○

11-18

APR Gain

0.00~40.00

10.00

○

11-19

APR Curve Time

0.00~655.35 sec

3.00

○

0~65535 (hour)

0

11-14

11-20
|
11-28

Reserved

11-29

Accumulative
Operation Time of
Phase-loss

11-30
|
11-40

Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

4-37

Chapter 4 Parameters|

4.3 Description of Parameter Settings
Group 0 User Parameters
00-00

Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
00-01

SVC

Factory setting: ##

FOCPG TQRPG

Read Only

Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

: This parameter can be set during operation.

SVC

Factory setting: ##

FOCPG TQRPG

Read Only

Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.

	

Pr.00-01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.

	

The factory setting is rated current for the constant torque and can be set in Pr.00-12.
230V Series

kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current
for Constant
Torque (A)
Rated Current
for Variable
Torque (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency

0.75
1.0
4

1.5
2.0
6

2.2
3.0
8

3.7
5.0
10

5.5
7.5
12

7.5
10
14

11
15
16

15
20
18

18.5
25
20

22
30
22

30
40
24

37
50
26

5

7.5

11

17

25

33

49

65

75

90

120

146

6.3

9.4

13.8

21.3

31.3

41.3

61.3

81.3

93.8

113

150

183

15kHz

9kHz

460V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current
for Constant
Torque (A)
Rated Current
for Variable
Torque (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency

4-38

0.75
1.0
5

1.5
2.0
7

2.2
3.0
9

3.7
5.0
11

5.5
7.5
13

7.5
10
15

11
15
17

15
20
19

18.5
25
21

22
30
23

30
40
25

37
50
27

45
60
29

55
75
31

75
100
33

3

4.2

6

8.5

13

18

24

32

38

45

60

73

91

110

150

3.8

5.3

7.5

10.6

16.3

22.5

30

40

47.5

56.3

75

91.3

113.8

138

188

15kHz

9kHz

6kHz

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

00-02
Control
mode

Parameter Reset
VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

0

No Function

1

Read Only

2

Enable Group 11 Parameters Setting

Factory setting: 0

8

Keypad Lock

9

All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 220V/380V)

10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
	

When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-00~00-07 and it can be used
with password setting for password protection.

	

This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06-17 ~ Pr.06-22).
50Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 50Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V or 400V.
60Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 60Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230Vor 460V.

	

When Pr.00-02=08, the KPV-CE01 keypad is locked and only Pr.00-02 can be set. To unlock
the keypad, set Pr.00-02=00.

	

When Pr.00-02 is set to 1 or 8, Pr.00-02 setting should be set to 0 before setting to other
setting.

	

After setting Pr.00-02 to 2, it can display group 11 to re-connect the keypad after disconnection
or re-power on after the power off.

00-03

Start-up Display Selection

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings 0
1

	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0

Display the frequency command value. (LED F)
Display the actual output frequency (LED H)

2

Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04 (LED U)

3

Display the output current (A)

This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.

00-04

Content of Multi-Function function Display

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

SVC

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0

4-39

Chapter 4 Parameters|

00-04

Content of Multi-Function function Display
Settings 0

4-40

Display the output current in A supplied to the motor

U

1

Display the counter value which counts the number of
pulses on TRG terminal

2

Display actual output frequency (H)

3

Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC
motor drive

4

Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.

5

Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U, V, W
to the motor.

6

Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W
to the motor.

7

Display the actual motor speed in rpm (enabled when
using with PG card).

8

Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates
to current.

9

Display PG position. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1 or 2, it
means that motor angle is 0~4XPr.10-00.

10

Display analog feedback signal value in %.

11

Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal in %.
Range 0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (1.)

12

Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in %.
Range 4~20mA/0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (2.)

13

Display the signal of AUI analog input terminal in %.
Range -10V~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (3.)

14

Display the temperature of heat sink in °C.

U

15

Display the temperature of IGBT in °C.

U

16

Display digital input status ON/OFF (i)

U

17

Display digital output status ON/OFF (o)

U

18

Display multi-step speed

U

19

The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.)

U

20

The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (o.)

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

00-04

Content of Multi-Function function Display
21

Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (Z)

U

22

Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (4)

U

23

Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (4.)

U

This parameter sets the display when Pr. 00-03 is set to 2.

	

It is used to display the content when LED U is ON. It is helpful for getting the AC motor drive’s

	

status by this parameter.
Terminal MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0: OFF, 1: ON
MI1: Pr.02-01 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1)
MI6: Pr.02-06 is set to 8 (the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection)
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 01102 in binary and 0086H in HEX.
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086” with LED U is ON on
the keypad KPV-CE01. The setting 16 is the status of digital input and the setting 19 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital input. User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status
and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.

Terminal
Status

Reserved
0

0

0

Reserved
0

0

0

0

Reserved
0

1

0

0

MO2 MO1 RA MRA
0

0

1

1

0

MRA: Pr.02-11 is set to 9 (Drive ready).
After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if there is no other abnormal status, the
contact will be ON. At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display 0001 with
LED U is ON on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output and the setting 20 is
the corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital
output status and then set to 20 to check if the wire if normal.

00-05

User Defined Coefficient K

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-41

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

SVC

Settings

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999

	

It is used digital setting method
Digital 4: decimal point number (0: no decimal point, 1: 1 decimal point and so on.)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 (the corresponding value for the max. frequency).
Digital 4 3
F
H
U

2

1

0

corresponding value
decimal point number

	

For example, if use uses rpm to display the motor speed and the corresponding value to the 4pole motor 60Hz is 1800. This parameter can be set to 01800 to indicate that the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 1800rpm. If the unit is rps, it can be set 10300 to indicate the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 30.0 (a decimal point).

00-06 Software Version
Control
mode

00-07
Control
mode

	

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

Read Only

Display

#.##

Factory setting: Read Only

Password Input
VF

VFPG

Unit: 1
SVC

Factory setting: 00

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535

Display

00~02 (times of wrong password)

The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “PcodE” will show up to force the user to restart
the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.

	

When forgetting password, you can decode by setting 9999 and press button

twice.

Please note that all the settings will be set to factory setting.
00-08
4-42

Password Set

Unit: 1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

	

VF

VFPG

SVC

Factory setting: 00

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535

Display

00

No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07

01

Password has been set

To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 00, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.0007. All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 01.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 00 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00-07.
The password consists of min. 2 digits and max. 5 digits.

	

How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00-08 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.

Password Decode Flow Chart
Password Setting

Decoding Flow Chart

00-08

00-08

Displays 01 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-08.

Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.

00-07

Correct Password
END

Incorrect Password
END

00-08

00-07

Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.

3 chances to enter the correct
password.
1st time displays "01" if
password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "02", if
password is incorrect.
3rd time displays "P code"
(blinking)

Forgetting Passwrod

00-07

After entering 9999, press
twice to decode. The parameter
setting will be set to factory setting.

If the password was entered
incorrectly after three tries,
the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to
re-enter the password.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-43

Chapter 4 Parameters|

00-09
Control
mode

Factory setting: 100%

FOCPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1

Energy Saving Gain

10~1000 %

When Pr.00-19 is set to1, this parameter can be used for energy saving. The setting should be
decreased when the energy saving is not well. When the motor is vibrated, the setting should
be increased.

00-10
Control
mode

Control Method
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

V/f control

1

V/f + Encoder (VFPG)

2

Sensorless vector control (SVC)

3

FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)

4

Torque control + Encoder (TQRPG)

This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
Setting 0: user can design V/f ratio by requirement and control multiple motors simultaneously.
Setting 1: User can use PG card with Encoder to do close-loop speed control.
Setting 2: To have optimal control characteristic by auto-tuning.
Setting 3: To increase torque and control speed precisely. (1:1000)
Setting 4: To increase accuracy for torque control.

00-11
Control
mode

V/f Curve Selection
VF

Settings

	

Factory setting: 0

VFPG

0

V/f curve determined by group 01

1

1.5 power curve

2

Square curve

When it is set to 0, the V/f curve setting for the motor 1 is according to Pr.01-01~Pr.01-08 and
Pr. 01-35~01-42 are for the motor 2.

	

When setting to 1 or 2, the settings of the 2nd voltage/frequency and the 3rd voltage/frequency
are invalid.

4-44

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

01-01 Frequency%

Chapter 4 Parameters|
01-02 voltage%
100
90
80
1.5 Power curve
70
60
50
40
30
Square curv e
20
10
0
80
100
20
40
60

00-12
Control
mode

Constant/Variable Torque Selection
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

0

Constant Torque (100%)

1

Variable Torque (125%)

Factory setting: 0

When “1” is selected, the oL level is 125% of rated drive current. All other overload ratings will
not change, example: 150% of rated drive current for 60 seconds.

00-13
Control
mode

Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Factory setting: 0

0

Linear accel./decel. I

1

Auto accel., linear decel.

2

Linear accel., auto decel.

3

Auto accel./decel. I

4

Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)

It can decrease the drive’s vibration during load starts and stops by setting this parameter.
Also it will speed up to the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current
when it detects small torque. At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the
smoothest deceleration time when the regenerated voltage of the load is detected.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-45

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
01- 00
Max.
Frequency

1
1 When Pr.00-13 is set to 0.
2 When Pr.00-13 is set to 3.

2
Min.
Frequency
01-05

Time

decel. time

accel. time

01-12
01-16

01-14
01-18

01-13
01-17

01-15
01-19

Accel./Decel. Time

00-14
Control
mode

Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG

0

Unit: 0.01 second

1

Unit: 0.1 second

This parameter determines the time unit for the Acceleration/Deceleration setting. Refer to
Pr.01-12 ~ Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. Time 1 to 4), Pr. 01-20~Pr.01-21 (JOG accel./decel. Time)
and Pr. 01-24~Pr.01-27 (S curve accel./decel. Time).

00-15

Reserved

00-16

Reserved

00-17

Carrier Frequency

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 10

FOCPG TQRPG

1~15kHz

This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.

Models
Setting Range
Factory Setting

1-5HP
0.75-3.7kW
01~15kHz
10kHz

230V/460V Series
7.5-25HP
5.5-18.5kW
01~15kHz
9kHz

30-60HP
22-45kW
01~09kHz
6kHz

Heat
Dissipation

Significant

Electromagnetic
Noise or Leakage
Current
Minimal

Minimal

Significant

Significant

Carrier
Frequency

Acoustic
Noise

1kH z

75-100HP
55-75Kw
01~06kHz
6kHz

Current
Wave

Minimal

8kH z
15kHz

4-46

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.

00-18
Control
mode

Auto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Enable AVR

1

Disable AVR

2

Disable AVR when deceleration stop

Factory setting: 0

It is used to select the AVR mode. AVR is used to regulate the output voltage to the motor. For
example, if V/f curve is set to AC200V/50Hz and the input voltage is from 200 to 264VAC, the
output voltage won’t excess AC200V/50Hz. If the input voltage is from 180 to 200V, the output
voltage to the motor and the input voltage will be in direct proportion.

	

When setting Pr.00-18 to 1 during ramp to stop and used with auto accel./decel. function, the
acceleration will be smoother and faster.

00-19
Control
mode

Auto Energy-saving Operation
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

0

Disable

1

Enable

Factory setting: 0

When the Auto Energy-saving function is enabled, the drive will operate with full voltage during
acceleration and deceleration. At constant speed, the AC drive will calculate the optimal output
voltage value for the load. It is possible for the output voltage to be 25% below Maximum
Output Voltage during auto energy-saving operation. This function should not be used with
variable loads or continuous rated output loads.

	

When output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will be auto
decreased with load reduction. To make the AC motor drive runs under the energy-saving with
the minimum value of the product of voltage and current.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-47

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output Voltage

100%
The maximum output voltage
reduction is 25%.

75%

Frequency
Auto Energy-saving Operation

00-20
Control
mode

Source of the Master Frequency Command
VF

Settings

	

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG

0

Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)

1

RS-485 serial communication

2

External analog input (Pr. 03-00)

3

External UP/DOWN terminal

4

Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-15 without direction)

5

Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-15)

This parameter determines the drive’s master frequency source.

00-21
Control
mode

Source of the Operation Command
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

VFPG

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)

1

External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.

2

RS-485 serial communication (RJ-11). Keypad STOP disabled.

When Pr.00-21 is set to 1, it also needs to set Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21 to 0. After pressing PU
key to make LED PU to be light, RUN, JOG and STOP key are valid now.

00-22
Control
mode

Stop Method
VF

Settings

4-48

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Ramp to stop

1

Coast to stop

Factory setting: 0

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid
stop command.
Output
Frequency

Output
Frequency

Time
Operation
Command

RUN

STOP

Operation
Command

Free running
to stop

RUN

Time

STOP

Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the maximum output frequency (Pr. 0100) to minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) according to the deceleration time and then
stop.
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and
the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safely of personnel or to prevent material
from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped.
The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to
select “coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps.
	

The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.

00-23
Control
mode

Reverse Operation
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Enable reverse

1

Disable reverse

2

Disable forward

Factory setting: 0

This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the Reverse Direction. It may be used to
prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure humans or damage
the equipment.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-49

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 1 Basic Parameters
01-00
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 0.01

Maximum Output Frequency
SVC

Factory setting: 60.00/50.00

FOCPG TQRPG

50.0 to 600.00Hz

This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA and -10V to
+10V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.

01-01 1st Output Frequency Setting 1
01-35 1st Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

SVC

Settings
	
	

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00~600.00Hz

These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it
should be set to 50Hz.

	

Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor.

01-02

1st Output Voltage Setting 1

01-36

1st Output Voltage Setting 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1

FOCPG TQRPG

230V series 0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 220.0

460V series 0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 440.0

These are for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be
set to 200.0.

	

There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also
difference. The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC
motor drive. There is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can
amplify the original characteristic and life of the motor.

01-03 2nd Output Frequency Setting 1
4-50

Unit: 0.01
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

Factory setting: 0.50

SVC

0.00~600.00Hz

01-04

2nd Output Voltage Setting 1

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

Unit: 0.1

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 5.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 10.0

01-37 2nd Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

0.00~600.00Hz

01-38

2nd Output Voltage Setting 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.50

VFPG

Unit: 0.1

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 5.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 10.0

01-05 3rd Output Frequency Setting 1
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

0.00~600.00Hz

01-06

3rd Output Voltage Setting 1

Control
mode

VF

Settings

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.50

VFPG

Unit: 0.1

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 5.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 10.0

01-39 3rd Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

0.00~600.00Hz

01-40

3rd Output Voltage Setting 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

VF

Settings
01-08

Unit: 0.1

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 5.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 10.0

01-07 4th Output Frequency Setting 1
Control
mode

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.50

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00~600.00Hz

4th Output Voltage Setting 1

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 0.1
4-51

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 0.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 0.0

01-41 4th Output Frequency Setting 2
Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00~600.00Hz

01-42

4th Output Voltage Setting 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

VFPG

Unit: 0.1

SVC

230V series

0.1 to 255.0V

Factory Setting: 0.0

460V series

0.1 to 510.0V

Factory Setting: 0.0

V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.

	

For the V/f curve setting, it should be Pr.01-01≥ Pr.01-03≥ Pr.01-05≥ Pr.01-07. There is no
limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at the low frequency may cause motor damage,
overheat, stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low voltage at
the low frequency to prevent motor damage.

	

Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr.0201 to Pr.02-14 is set to 14 and enabled or switch to the Δ-connection, the AC motor drive will
act as the 2nd V/f curve.

01-09
Control
mode

Start Frequency
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

Unit: 0.01
SVC

FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.50

0.00~600.00Hz

When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.

	

Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)

4-52

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

F cmd>Fmi n

NO

by Pr.01- 34

Y ES

F star t>Fmin

NO

fstart=F min

F low= 0

Y ES

H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd

Y ES

F min

fstart=F star t

F star t
Time

F low= 0

operation after
start-up
NO

NO

F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES

by
Pr.01- 34

NO

F cmdFmi n
NO

Y ES

Y ES

H=Fc md
Hz

H=Fc md

F star t
F min

Hz

Hz
60Hz

F cmd

H=Fl ow

F cmd1
F min
F cmd2
Time F low

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

60Hz
H=Fc md1
F cmd1>Flow&
F cmd1>Fmin

Time
by Pr.01- 34
F cmd2>Flow&
F cmd2 Fcmd1
>F min

Time
by Pr.01- 34
F min>Fc md2

4-53

Chapter 4 Parameters|

NO

F cmd>Fmi n

by Pr.01- 34

Y ES
NO

F star t>Fmin

fstart=F min

F low= 0

Y ES

H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd

Y ES

F min

fstart=F star t

F star t
Time
operation after
start-up
NO

F low= 0

NO

F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES

by
Pr.01- 34

NO

F cmdFmi n
NO

Y ES

Y ES

H=Fc md

H=Fc md
60Hz

F cmd

F cmd1
F min
F cmd2
Time F low

F star t
F min

01-10

Output Frequency Upper Limit
VF

Settings
01-11
Control
mode

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

60Hz
H =Fc md1
F cmd1>Flow &
F cmd1>Fmin

Time
by Pr.01- 34
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2 Fcmd1
>F min

Time
by Pr.01- 34
F min>Fc md2

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 600.00

0.00~600.00Hz

Output Frequency Lower Limit
VF

Hz

Hz

Hz

Control
mode

H=Fl ow

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00~600.00Hz

The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If
output frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than

4-54

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

min. frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to
be higher than the lower limit frequency.
Voltage
Output Frequency
Output Frequency
1st Output
Upper Limit
01-10
Voltage Setting 1 01-11 Lower Limit
01-02
Frequency output
2nd Output
ranges limitation
Voltage Setting 1
01-04
Regular V/f Curve
3rd Output
Special V/f Curve
Voltage Setting 1
01-06

4th Output
Voltage Setting 1
01-08 01-07 01-09
01-05 01-03
01-01
1st Freq.
3rd Freq.
4th Freq.
2nd Freq.
Start Freq.

Frequency
01-00
Maximum Output
Frequency

V/f Curve
01-12

Accel. Time 1

01-13

Decel. Time 1

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-14

Accel. Time 2

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-15

Decel. Time 2

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-16

Accel. Time 3

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-17

Decel. Time 3

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-18

Accel. Time 4

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-19

Decel. Time 4

Unit: 0.1/0.01

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

Unit: 0.1/0.01

SVC

FOCPG

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

01-20

JOG Acceleration Time

01-21

JOG Deceleration Time

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00/1.0

0.00~600.00 sec/0.00~6000.0 sec

The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp
from 0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).

	

The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.

	

The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.00-13 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-55

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. See Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-30 for details.

	

When enabling torque limit and stall prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will longer
than the above action time.
Frequency

01-00

Max. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting

Time
accel. time

decel. time

01-12,14,16,18,20

01-13,15,17,19,21

Accel./Decel. Time

01-22

JOG Frequency

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.01
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 6.00

0.00~600.00Hz

Both external terminal JOG and key “JOG” on the keypad can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22).
When the jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero.
The used Accel./Decel. time is set by the Jog Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21).

01-23

1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00~600.00Hz

This parameter selects the frequency point for transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1
to acceleration/deceleration time 4.

	

The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may
also be enabled by the external terminals (Pr. 02-01 to 02-08). The external terminal has
priority over Pr. 01-23.

01-24

S-curve for Acceleration Departure Time 1

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-25

S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time 2

Unit: 0.1/0.01

01-26

S-curve for Deceleration Departure Time 1

Unit: 0.1/0.01

4-56

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

01-27
Control
mode

S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time 2
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 0.2/0.0

FOCPG

0.00~25.00 sec /0.00~250.0 sec

It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve
can adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different
accel./decel. curve by the accel./decel. time.

	
	

The S-curve function is disabled when Pr.00-13 is set to 0.
The Actual Accel. Time = selected accel. Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
The Actual Decel. Time = selected decel. Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
Frequency
01-25

01-24

01-26

01-27

Time

01-28

Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)

Unit: 0.01

01-29

Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)

Unit: 0.01

01-30

Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit)

Unit: 0.01

01-31

Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit)

Unit: 0.01

01-32

Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit)

Unit: 0.01

01-33

Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit)

Unit: 0.01

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00~600.00Hz

These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. The skip frequencies are
useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By skipping this
frequency, the vibration will be avoided.

01-34
Control
mode

Mode Selection when Frequency< Fmin
VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

0

Output Waiting

1

Zero-speed operation

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Factory Setting: 0

4-57

Chapter 4 Parameters|

2

Fmin (4th output frequency setting)

	

When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.

	

When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from
terminals U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG and

	

SVC modes.
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-

	

08, Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes.
In V/f, VFPG and SVC modes

	

fout
01-34=1

01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07

	

0Hz

0Hz
stop waiting for output

01-34=2

0Hz oper ation
(DC br ake)

In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.

fout
01-34=0

01-34=1

01-34=2

fmin
01-07
frequency command

4-58

frequency command

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
02-00
Control
mode

2-wire/3-wire Operation Control
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

0

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

FWD/STOP, REV/STOP

1

FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)

2

RUN/STOP, REV/FWD

3

RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)

4

3-wire (momentary push button)

5

3-wire (momentary push button and Line Start Lockout)

Three of the six methods include a “Line Start Lockout” feature. When line start lockout is
enabled, the drive will not run once applying the power. The Line Start Lockout feature doesn’t
guarantee the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in
motion by a malfunctioning switch.
02-00

Control Circuits of the External Terminal

0, 1
2-wire operation control (1)

FWD/STOP

FWD/STOP

REV/STOP

FWD:("OPEN":STO P)
("CLOSE":FWD )
REV:("O PEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": RE V)

REV/STOP

DCM

2, 3
2-wire operation control (2)

RUN/STOP

RUN/STOP

FWD/REV

FWD:("O PEN":STO P)
("CLOSE":RUN)
REV:( "OP EN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)

REV/FWD
4, 5
3-wire operation control

DCM

STOP

VFD-VE

RUN

VFD-VE

FWD "CLOS E":RU N
MI1 "OPEN":STOP

REV/FWD

REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD
"CLOSE": REV

DCM

02-01

Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1)

02-02

Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2)

VFD-VE

Factory Setting: 1
Factory Setting: 2
02-03

Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Factory Setting: 3

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-59

Chapter 4 Parameters|

02-04

Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4)

02-05

Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5)

02-06

Multi-Function Input Command 6 (MI6)

02-23

Multi-Function Input Command 7 (MI7)

02-24

Multi-Function Input Command 8 (MI8)

02-25

Multi-Function Input Command 9 (MI9)

02-26

Multi-Function Input Command 10 (MIA)

02-27

Multi-Function Input Command 11 (MIB)

02-28

Multi-Function Input Command 12

02-29

Multi-Function Input Command 13

02-30

Multi-Function Input Command 14

Factory Setting: 4
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Settings

0-50
Settings

0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/ multi-step position
command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/ multi-step position
command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4/ multi-step position
command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-36)
11: B.B. input
12: Output stop

4-60

VF
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Settings
13: cancel the setting of the optimal
acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between drive settings 1 and 2
15: operation speed command form AVI
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI
18: Emergency Stop (07-36)
19: Digital Up command
20: Digital Down command
21: PID function disabled
22: clear counter
23: input the counter value (multi-function input command
6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC+PG/FOC+PG model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for 　connection

31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-29)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-30)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-31)
34: Enable multi-step position control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force stop
41: Serial position clock
42: Serial position input
43: Analog input resolution selection
44: Reset initial reel diameter
45: Reset initial reel diameter 0
46: Reset initial reel diameter 1
47: Reset PID control integration of tension
48: Mechanical Gear Ratio Switch
49: Reserved
50: Reserved

	
	

VF
○

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○

○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○
○

○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○

This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-23~Pr.02-27 are virtual and set as MI7~MIB when using with optional
card EMV-APP01

	

If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is needed for the 3rd wire position.
Therefore, MI1 is not allowed for any other operation.

	

Multi-function input commands 7-14 are the extension terminals of Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06. There
are 14 terminals but the terminals 7-14 are virtual terminals and you can set the status of bit 815 of Pr.02-10 to ON or OFF by KPV-CE01 or communication.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-61

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

4-62

Functions

Descriptions

0

No Function

1

Multi-step speed
command 1/multi-step
position command 1

2

Multi-step speed
command 2/ multi-step
position command 2

3

Multi-step speed
command 3/ multi-step
position command 3

4

Multi-step speed
command 4/ multi-step
position command 4

5

Reset

After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to
reset the drive.

6

JOG Command

JOG operation

7

When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration
is stopped and the AC motor drive start to accel./decel. from
Speed Inhibit
the inhibit point.

8

The 1st, 2nd acceleration
or deceleration time
selection

9

The 3rd, 4th acceleration
or deceleration time
selection

10

EF Input

External fault input terminal

11

B.B. Input

If the ON/OFF function of the terminal is pre-determined,
output of the drive will be cut off immediately, and the motor
will then be of the B.B. status. And once the ON/OFF function
is restored, the drive will then trace from the bottom upward to
catch up with its mutual rotation speed with the same
frequency before B.B., then speed up to the pre-set
frequency. Even if the motor is of a complete stop after B.B.,
as long as the ON/OFF status is restored, the speed-tracing
function could still be operated.

12

Output Stop

If the ON/OFF function of the terminal is pre-determined,
output of the drive will be cut off immediately, and the motor
will then be free run. And once the ON/OFF function is
restored, the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency.

13

Cancel the setting of the Before using this function, Pr.00-13 should be set to

15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital
statuses of the 4 terminals, and 17 in total if the master speed
and JOG are included. (Refer to Pr. 04-00~04-29)

The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be
selected from this function or the digital statuses of the
terminals; there are 4 acceleration/deceleration speeds in
total for selection.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions

optimal accel./decel. time 01/02/03/04 first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for
auto mode and ON is for linear accel./decel.
14

Switch between drive
settings 1 and 2

When this function is enabled, the drive will start to use motor
2 parameters.

15

Operation speed
command form AVI

When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be AVI.

16

Operation speed
command form ACI

When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be ACI.

17

Operation speed
command form AUI

When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
force to be AUI.

18

Emergency Stop (07-36)

When this function is enabled, the drive will ramp to stop by
Pr.07-36 setting.

19

Digital Up command

20

Digital Down command

21

PID function disabled

When this function is ON, the PID function is disabled.

22

Clear counter

When this function is enabled, it will clear current counter
value and display “0”. Only when this function is disabled, it
will keep counting upward.

23

Input the counter value
(multi-function input
command 6)

When this function is enabled, the counter value will increase
1.

24

FWD JOG command

When this function is enabled, the drive will execute forward
Jog command.

25

REV JOG command

When this function is enabled, the drive will execute reverse
Jog command.

26

TQC+PG/FOC+PG
model selection

27

ASR1/ASR2 selection

28

Emergency stop (EF1)

29

Signal confirmation for YWhen it is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
connection

30

Signal confirmation for
Δ−connection

When it is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.

31

High torque bias (by
Pr.07-29)

The high torque bias is according to the Pr.07-29 setting.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

When this function is enabled, the frequency will be increased
and decreased. If this function keeps ON, the frequency will
be increased/decreased by Pr.02-07/Pr.02-08. This function is
the same as the ▲▼ key on the keypad.

OFF: FOC+PG speed control mode.
ON: TQR+PG torque control mode.
ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting.
When it is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop. (it will
have fault code record)

4-63

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions

32

Middle torque bias (by
Pr.07-30)

The middle torque bias is according to the Pr.07-30 setting.

33

Low torque bias (by
Pr.07-31)

The low torque bias is according to the Pr.07-31 setting.
When this function is enabled, the corresponding 15-step
speed for the multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions.
(Refer to Pr.04-15 to Pr.04-29)
position mode

speed mode

speed mode

Run
MI=d35
MI=d34
1

1

0

0

0

0

0

MI=d3

1

1

1

1

MI=d4

1

1

1

1

MI=d1
MI=d2

34

10-19
position
(Home)

Enable multi-step
position control

04-27
multiposition
13

0

04-26
multiposition
12

04-11
12th step
speed
frequency

position mode

speed mode
Run
MI=d34
MI=d35
MI=d1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

MI=d3

1

1

1

1

MI=4

1

1

1

1

MI=d2

主速

04-12
13th step
speed
frequency

4-64

04-27
multiposition
13

04-26
multiposition
12

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions
When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will start to
execute position control.
Motor
F requenc y
PG
F eedback
10-00
10-01

10-19

RU N
MI=d35

35

Enable position control

MO= d39

Time

Motor
frequency
PG
feedbac k
10-00
10-01
RUN

10-19

RUN

RUN

MI=d35
MO= d39

36

Time

When this function is enabled, it will select the corresponding
Enable position learning multi-position by the ON/OFF status of multi-function inputs 14 and written the current motor position into the corresponding
function (valid at stop)
multi-position.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-65

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions
Run/Stop
1011 2=11
cor responds
to Pr.04-25

1010 2=10
cor responds to
Pr.04- 24

MI=d1

1

0

0

MI=d2

1

1

1

MI=d3

0

0

0

MI=d4

1

1

1

MI=d36

T he motor position
is from enc oder feedbac k
and written into the
cor responding multiposition of ON/O FF
status of MI1 to MI4
(P r.04-25)

T he motor position
is from enc oder feedbac k
and written into the
cor responding multiposition of ON/O FF
status of MI1 to MI4
( P r.04-24)

When this function is enabled, the pulse of PG card will
change from speed command to position command. It is
recommended to set Pr.10-23 to 0.
Example: When it is controlled by pulse (Pr.00-20 is set to 5),
please refer to the following diagram for returning home.
37

Enable pulse position
input command

R UN
MI=d35
MO= d5
MI=d37

4-66

Time

38

Disable write EEPROM
function

When this function is enabled, you can’t write into EEPROM.

39

Torque command
direction

When the torque command source is AVI or ACI, it can
change torque direction by enabling this function.

40

Force stop

When this function is enabled, the drive will free run to stop.

41

Serial position clock

The position method of the main shaft:

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions
When using setting 41 and setting 42, it needs to use with 2
input terminals for multi-position control.

C NC
Con tro ller
(PLC)

DO

SPI Po si ti on Co mman d Cl ock

DI

DO

SPI Po si ti on Co mman d Data

DI

transmission start
1 2

42

Serial position input

3 4

PG position
co ntr ol point
Pr.10 -19
main
shaft
VFD -VE

PG position
co ntrol point
Pr.10 -19

11 12

OSS
Clock
Rea dy for t ra nsmission

main shaft
VFD-VE

OSS
Dat a

test example
angle En cod er b11 b1 0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
36 0
18 0
90
45
13 7
30 8

40 96
40 95
20 48
10 24
51 2
15 58
35 04
36 87

0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1

0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0

0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0

0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1

0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0

0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1

0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1

0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1

43

Analog input resolution
selection

Refer to Pr.10-25.

44

Reset initial reel
diameter

When this function is enabled, the initial reel diameter is reset.

45

Reset initial reel
diameter 0

46

Reset initial reel
diameter 1

47

Reset PID control
integration of tension

When this function is enabled, the PID control integration of
tension is reset.

48

Mechanical Gear Ratio
Switch

When this functioni is enabled, the mechanical gear ratio
switch will be the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-29 and
Pr.10-30).

49
|
50

Reserved

When this function is enabled, Pr.08-46~08-48 is valid.

02-07

UP/DOWN Key Mode

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

0

Up/down by the accel/decel time

1

Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-08)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Factory setting: 0

4-67

Chapter 4 Parameters|

02-08
Control
mode

The Acceleration/Deceleration Speed of the UP/DOWN Key
with Constant Speed
VF

Settings
	

SVC

Factory setting: 0.01

FOCPG

0.01 ~ 1.00Hz/ms

These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20.

02-09
Control
mode

Digital Input Response Time
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

Unit: 0.01

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.001
Factory setting: 0.005

FOCPG TQRPG

0.001~ 30.000 sec

This parameter is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time
is confirmation time to prevent some uncertain interferences that would result in error (except
for the counter input) in the input of the digital terminals (FWD, REV and MI1~6). Under this
condition, confirmation for this parameter could be improved effectively, but the response time
will be somewhat delayed.

02-10

Digital Input Operation Direction

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0 ~ 65535

This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the
SINK/SOURCE status.

	
	

Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only
need to set Pr.02-10=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesn’t
need to wire any multi-function terminal.
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4

bit3

bit2 bit1

MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3

MI2

MI1 REV FWD

02-11

Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB, RC (Relay1)

02-12

Multi-function Output 2 MRA, MRC (Relay2)

bit0

Factory Setting: 11

4-68

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Factory Setting: 1
02-13

Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)

02-14

Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)

02-35

Multi-function Output 5 (MO3) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
02-36

Multi-function Output 5 6 (MO4) (need to use with EMV-APP01)
Factory Setting: 0

02-37

Multi-function Output 5 7 (MO3MO5) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

02-38

Multi-function Output 8 (MO6) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

02-39

Multi-function Output 9 (MO7) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

02-40

Multi-function Output 10 (MO8) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0

02-41

Multi-function Output 11 (MO9) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

02-42

Multi-function Output 12 (MOA) (need to use with EMV-APP01)

Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Settings

0-50
Settings

0: No function
1: Operation indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-19)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-21)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive ready
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection
11: Malfunction indication
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
4-69

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-31)
13: Overheat
14: Software brake signal
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-16)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-17)
19: Baseblock (B.B.) Indication
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-32
28: Output when current < Pr.02-32
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-33
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-33
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: Δ connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Motor zero-speed output (Pr.02-43)
44: Max. reel diameter attained
45: Empty reel diameter attained
46: Broken belt detection
47: Break release at stop
48: Error PID feedback of tension
49: Reserved
50: Reserved

Settings

4-70

Functions

VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Descriptions

0

No Function

1

Operation Indication

Active when the drive is not at STOP.

2

Master Frequency
Attained

Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency
setting.

3

Desired Frequency
Attained 1 (Pr.02-19)

Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-19) is attained.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

Functions

Descriptions

4

Desired Frequency
Attained 2 (Pr.02-21)

Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-21) is attained.

5

Zero Speed (frequency
command)

Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at
RUN mode)

6

Zero Speed with Stop
(frequency command)

Active when frequency command =0 or stop.

7

Over Torque (OT1)
(Pr.06-06~06-08)

Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-06 (overtorque detection selection-OT1), Pr.06-07 (over-torque
detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection timeOT1).

8

Over Torque (OT2)
(Pr.06-09~06-11)

Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-09 (overtorque detection selection-OT2), Pr.06-10 (over-torque
detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection timeOT2).

9

Drive Ready

Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.

10

User-defined Lowvoltage Detection

Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00
low voltage level)

11

Malfunction Indication

Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).

12

Mechanical Brake
Release (Pr.02-31)

When drive runs after Pr.02-31, it will be ON. This function
should be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use
contact ”b”(N.C).

13

Overheat

Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn
off the drive. (refer to Pr.06-05)

14

Software Brake Signal

This function is used in conjunction with a VFDB Brake Unit.
The output will be activated when the drive needs help braking
the load. A smooth deceleration is achieved by using this
function. (refer to Pr.07-00)

15

PID Feedback Error

Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.

16

Slip Error (oSL)

Active when the slip error is detected.

17

Terminal Count Value
Attained

Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value
(Pr.02-16).

18

Preliminary Counter
Value Attained

Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-17).

19

Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication

Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during
baseblock.

20

Warning Output

Active when the warning is detected.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-71

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

4-72

Functions

Descriptions

21

Over-voltage Warning

Active when the over-voltage is detected.

22

Over-current Stall
Prevention Warning

Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.

23

Over-voltage Stall
prevention Warning

Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.

24

Operation Mode
Indication

Active when the operation command is controlled by external
terminal.

25

Forward Command

Active when the operation direction is forward.

26

Reverse Command

Active when the operation direction is reverse.

27

Output when Current >=
Active when current is >= Pr.02-32.
Pr.02-32

28

Output when Current <
Pr.02-32

29

Output when frequency
Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-33.
>= Pr.02-33

30

Output when Frequency
Active when frequency is < Pr.02-33.
< Pr.02-33

31

Y-connection for the
Motor Coil

Active when PR.05-12 is less than PR.05-11 and time is more
than Pr.05-30.

32

Δ-connection for the
Motor Coil

Active when PR.05-12 is higher than PR.05-11 and time is
more than Pr.05-30.

33

Zero Speed (actual
output frequency)

Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should
be at RUN mode)

34

Zero Speed with Stop
(actual output
frequency)

Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.

35

Error Output Selection 1
Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
(Pr.06-23)

36

Error Output Selection 2
Active when Pr.06-24 is ON.
(Pr.06-24)

37

Error Output Selection 3
Active when Pr.06-25 is ON.
(Pr.06-25)

38

Error Output Selection 4
Active when Pr.06-26 is ON.
(Pr.06-26)

39

Position Attained
(Pr.10-19)

Active when current is < Pr.02-32.

Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19.
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
40

41

Functions

Descriptions

Speed Attained
(including zero speed)

Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or
stop.

Multi-position Attained

User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-11, Pr.02-12 and Pr.02-13
to 41 and only the multi-position of the second point has been
done. Therefore, current status are RA (OFF), MRA (ON) and
MO1 (OFF). In this way, their status is 010.
This function should be used with Pr.02-31, Pr.02-32 and
Pr.02-33.

42

Crane Function

Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-33 and Fcmd > Pr.02-33
and output current > Pr.02-32 and Time > Pr.02-31.
The example of the crane application is in the following for
your reference.

43

Motor Zero-speed
Output (Pr.02-43)

Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-43.

44

Max. Reel Diameter
Attained

Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-43.

45

Empty Reel Diameter
Attained

Active when the reel diameter is equal to Pr.08-44.

46

Broken Belt Detection

The broken belt occurs when 1. line speed is higher than
Pr.08-61, 2. the error of reel diameter exceeds Pr.08-61, 3.
detection time exceeds Pr.08-62
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal
will be ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-33. After it is ON,
it will be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-31.
F requenc y
command

47

F requenc y
command < 02- 33

Break Release at Stop
RUN

Multi-function
output MO=47

48

Error PID Feedback of
Tension

49

Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

RUN

02-31

When the error between PID target value and PID feedback
exceeds Pr.08-63 and allowance error detection time of
tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.08-64, please refer to Pr. 0864 for error treatment of tension PID feedback.

4-73

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
50

Functions

Descriptions

Reserved

Example of crane function

F requenc y
command

F req. command>02-31
& output c ur rent >02- 32

multi-function output
MO= 42 (Ac ti ve w hen
F com>=02-33, output
cur rent> 02- 32 and time
>02-31)

F req. command<02-33
or output c urrent < 02- 32

02-31

02-31

It is recommended to be used with Dwell function (Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18) as shown in the following:
Set 07-16=02-33and
output current >02-32

Set 07-18=02-33 and
output current <02-32
07-18 Dwell Freq.
at Decel.

07-16 Dwell
Freq.
at Accel.
07-15
Dwell Time at Accel.

Output Freq.

Multi-functioni output
MO= 42
( Activate when
Fcmd >= 02-33
output current > 02-32
Time > 02-31)

02-31
Brake Delay Time

07-17
Dwell Time atDecel.

02-31
Brake Delay Time

Mechanical breaker
Crane function will be activated when
setting 07-16=02-33 and Fcmd>02-33
and output current>02-32 and
Time > 02-31

02-15

Multi-output Direction

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit:1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0

0 ~ 65535

This parameter is set via bit setting. If a bit is 1, the corresponding output acts in the opposite
way.

Example:
If Pr02-11=1 and Pr02-15=0, Relay 1 RA-RC is closed when the drive runs and is open when
the drive is stopped.
4-74

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

If Pr02-11=1 and Pr02-15=1, Relay 1 RA-RC is open when the drive runs and is closed when
the drive is stopped.
	

Bit setting
bit3
MO2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

02-16
Control
mode

bit2
MO1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

bit0
MRA
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Pr02-15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Terminal Count Value
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

bit1
RA
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

SVC

Unit:1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0

0 ~ 65535

The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is
set to 17).

02-17
Control
mode

Preliminary Count Value
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit:1
Factory setting: 0

0 ~ 65535

When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal
will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-11 to 02-14 set to 18 (Preliminary Count Value
Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make the drive runs from
the low speed to stop.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-75

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Display value
[00-04=01]

TRG [02-06=23]
Counter Trigger
The width of trigger signal
(output signal)
Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-11 ~ Pr.02-14)

02-13=18

Terminal Counter Value

02-18
Control
mode

02-14=17

02-16=5

Digital Output Gain
VF

VFPG

SVC

Settings
	

02-17=3

Unit:1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 1

1 ~ 40

It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency
output (pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-18.

02-19

Desired Frequency Attained 1

Control
mode

VF

02-20

The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Control
mode

VF

02-21

Desired Frequency Attained 2

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Control
mode

VF

02-22

The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

VFPG

SVC

SVC

FOCPG

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 2.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 2.00

0.00 ~ 600.00Hz

Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-11~Pr.02-14), this multi-function output terminal will be ON.

4-76

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

H
Fcmd=60Hz
02-21=40Hz
02-22=2Hz

42Hz
40Hz
38Hz

02-19=10Hz
02-20=2Hz

12Hz
10Hz
8Hz
T

02-11~14=3

02-11~14=4

02-31

Brake Delay Time

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit:0.001
SVC

Factory setting: 0.000

FOCPG TQRPG

0.000~65.000 Sec

When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-31 delay time, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. This function should be used with
DC brake.

Moto r sp ee d/
Outpu t fre que nc y

07 -0 2
DC br ake
time d uri ng
star t-up

07 -0 3
DC br ake
time d uri ng
stop pi ng

DC br ake

DC br ake

ON

R UN /STO P

Mul ti- func ti on o utpu t
(me cha ni cal b rake re le ase )
Pr.02 -11 to 0 2-1 4=12

STOP

02 -3 1 b rake d el ay ti me

bou nce ti me o f mec han ic al bra ke
Mec han i cal br ake

02-32
Control
mode

br ake d

re le ase

Output Current Level Setting for External Terminals
VF

VFPG

SVC

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

br ake d

Unit:1
Factory setting: 0

4-77

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
	

0~100%

When output current is higher than Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 27).

	

When output current is lower than Pr.02-32, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 28).

02-33
Control
mode

Output Boundary for External Terminals
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit:0.01
Factory setting: 0.00

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00~+-60.00Hz

When output frequency is higher than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 29).

	

When output frequency is lower than Pr.02-33, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 is set to 30).

02-34
Control
mode

External Operation Control Selection after Reset
VF

VFPG

Settings

Unit:1
Factory setting: 0

SVC

0: Disable
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset

	

After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the
drive can run after pressing RESET key.

02-43
Control
mode

Zero-speed Level of Motor
VF

Settings

4-78

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0

0~65535rpm

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
03-00

Analog Input 1 (AVI)
Factory Setting: 1

03-01

Analog Input 2 (ACI)

03-02

Analog Input 3 (AUI)

Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control
mode)
2: torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value (refer to group 8)
5: PID feedback signal (refer to group 8)
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PID feedback signal of tension
12: Line speed
13: Reel diameter
14: PID target value of tension (tension closed-loop)
15: Tension setting (tension open-loop)
16: Zero-speed tension
17: Tension taper

	

VF
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○

When it is frequency command or TQR speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±
10V/4~20mA is 0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)

	

When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 –
max. output torque (Pr.07-22).

	

When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated
torque.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-79

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Positive torque
03-00~02=7
Positive torque limit

03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit

Reverse

Forward

03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit

03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit

03-03
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

03-04

-100.0~100.0%

Analog Input Bias 1 (ACI)
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

-100.0~100.0%

03-05

Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI)
VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0

-100.0~100.0%

It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.

03-06

Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)

03-07

Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)

03-08

Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)

4-80

Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0

It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.

Control
mode

	

Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0

It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.

Control
mode

	

Negative Torque

Analog Input Bias 1 (AVI)

Settings
	

03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Zero bias

1

Lower than bias=bias

2

Greater than bias=bias

3

The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center

4

Serve bias as the center

In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
03-00
to
03-02

03-09~03-11 gain is positive

0 Z er o bias
4

4

1 Low er than bias =bias
2 Gr eater than bias= bi as
T he absolute value of the bias voltage

-1 0V -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

2 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0V

Negativ e bias

3 while s erving as the c enter
4 Serv e bias as the center

bias

2

bias
Positiv e bias

4

03-09

Analog Input Gain 1 (AVI)

Unit: 1

03-10

Analog Input Gain 1 (ACI)

Unit: 1

03-11

Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI)

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 100.0

-500.0~500.0%

Parameters 03-03 to 03-11 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.

03-12

ACI/AVI2 Selection

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

VFPG

0
1

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0

ACI
AVI 2

There are two AVI analog inputs can be used when this parameter is set to 1 and the SW2 on
the control board is set to AVI2. At this moment, ACI is for voltage input.

03-13

Analog Input Delay Time (AVI)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 0.01
4-81

Chapter 4 Parameters|

03-14

Analog Input Delay Time (ACI)

Unit: 0.01

03-15

Analog Input Delay Time (AUI)

Unit: 0.01

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

0.00 to 2.00 sec

These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.

03-16

Addition Function of the Analog Input

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

Factory setting: 0.01

FOCPG TQRPG

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)

1

Enable

When Pr.03-16 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI
and AUI are AVI>ACI>AUI.
Frequency

Voltage
Fcommand=[(ay bias)*gain]* Fmax(01-00)
10V or 16mA
Fcommand: the corresponding
frequency for 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr. 03-04, Pr.03-05
gain : Pr.03-09, Pr.03-10, Pr.03-11

03-17
Control
mode

Loss of the ACI Signal
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Continue operation at the last frequency

2

Decelerate to stop

3

Stop immediately and display E.F.

This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.

03-18

Analog Output Selection 1

Unit: 1

03-21

Analog Output Selection 2 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)

Unit: 1

03-24

Analog Output Selection 3 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)

Unit: 1

Control
mode

VF

4-82

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory setting: 0
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
Settings

0 to 19
Functions

Descriptions

0

Output frequency (Hz)

Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.

1

Frequency command
(Hz)

Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.

2

Motor speed (Hz)

600Hz is regarded as 100%

3

Output current (rms)

2.5 X rated current is regarded as 100%

4

Output voltage

2 X rated voltage is regarded as 100%

5

DC Bus Voltage

450V (900V)=100%

6

Power factor

-1.000~1.000=100%

7

Power

Rated power is regarded as 100%

8

Output torque

Full-load torque is regarded as 100%

9

AVI

0~10V=0~100%

10

ACI

0~20mA=0~100%

11

AUI

-10~10V=0~100%

12

q-axis current

(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%

13

q-axis feedback value

(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%

14

d-axis current

15

d-axis feedback value

16

q-axis voltage

250V (500V) =100%

17

d-axis voltage

250V (500V) =100%

18

Torque command

Rated torque is regarded as 100%

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%

4-83

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
19

Functions

Descriptions

Pulse frequency
command

Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.

03-19

Analog Output Gain 1

Unit: 0.1

03-22

Analog Output Gain 2 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)

Unit: 0.1

03-25

Analog Output Gain 3 (need to be used with EMV-APP01)

Unit: 0.1

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Factory setting: 100.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0 to 200.0%

	

It is used to adjust the analog voltage level that terminal AFM outputs.

	

This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.

03-20

Analog Output Value in REV Direction 1

03-23

Analog Output Value in REV Direction 2

03-26

Analog Output Value in REV Direction 3

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Factory setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Absolute value in REV direction

1

Output 0V in REV direction

2

Enable output voltage in REV direction

10V( 20mA)

10V( 20mA)

0V
( 0mA)

03-20=0
03-23=0
03-26=0

03-18
03-21
03-24

10V( 20mA)

F requenc y
0V
( 0mA)

03-20=1
03-23=1
03-26=1

F requenc y
5V
( 12mA)

03-20=2
03-23=2
03-26=2

Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on

4-84

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
04-00

1st Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-01

2nd Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-02

3rd Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-03

4th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-04

5th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-05

6th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-06

7th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-07

8th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-08

9th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-09

10th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-10

11th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-11

12th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-12

13th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-13

14th Step Speed Frequency

Unit: 0.01

04-14

15th Step Speed Frequency

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00

0.00 to 600.00 Hz

04-15

Multi-position 1

Unit: 1

04-16

Multi-position 2

Unit: 1

04-17

Multi-position 3

Unit: 1

04-18

Multi-position 4

Unit: 1

04-19

Multi-position 5

Unit: 1

04-20

Multi-position 6

Unit: 1

04-21

Multi-position 7

Unit: 1

04-22

Multi-position 8

Unit: 1

04-23

Multi-position 9

Unit: 1

04-24

Multi-position 10

Unit: 1

04-25

Multi-position 11

Unit: 1

04-26

Multi-position 12

Unit: 1

04-27

Multi-position 13

Unit: 1

04-28

Multi-position 14

Unit: 1

04-29

Multi-position 15

Control
mode

VFPG

FOCPG

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
4-85

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
	

Please refer to the explanation of Pr.02-00 to Pr.02-06.

Pr.10-19 setting
04-15 multi-position 1
04-16 multi-position2
04-17 multi-position 3
04-18 multi-position 4
04-19 multi-position 5
04-20 multi-position 6
04-21 multi-position 7
04-22 multi-position 8
04-23 multi-position 9
04-24 multi-position 10
04-25 multi-position 11
04-26 multi-position 12
04-27 multi-position 13
04-28 multi-position 14
04-29 multi-position 15

4-86

0 to 65535

MI4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

MI3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

MI2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

MI1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Master frequency
04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-02 3rd step speed frequency
04-03 4th step speed frequency
04-04 5th step speed frequency
04-05 6th step speed frequency
04-06 7th step speed frequency
04-07 8th step speed frequency
04-08 9th step speed frequency
04-09 10th step speed frequency
04-10 11th step speed frequency
04-11 12th step speed frequency
04-12 13th step speed frequency
04-13 14th step speed frequency
04-14 15th step speed frequency

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 5 Motor Parameters
05-00
Control
mode

Motor Auto Tuning
SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

	

0

No function

1

Rolling test

2

Static Test

3

Reserved

Factory setting: 0

Starting auto tuning by pressing RUN key and it will write the measure value into Pr.05-05 to
Pr.05-09 for motor 1 and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2.

	

The steps to AUTO-Tuning are: (when setting to 1)
1.

Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.

2.

Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not
connected to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 or 3 if the motor can’t
separate from the load.

3.

Motor 1: fill in Pr.01-02, Pr.01-01, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-04 with correct
values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.
Motor 2: fill in Pr.01-36, Pr.01-35, Pr.05-13, Pr.05-14, Pr.05-15 and Pr.05-16 with correct
values. Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.

4.

When Pr.05-00 is set to 1, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a “RUN” command. (NOTE: the motor will run!)

5.

After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.05-05 to Pr.05-09 for motor 1
and Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21 for motor 2.

	

If Pr.05-00 is set to 2, it needs to input Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.

NOTE
1.

In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.

2.

It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the
rated power of the AC motor drive.

3.

When tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals or change Pr.05-10 for
motor 1/motor 2 selection.

4.

The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.

5.

The rated speed can’t be larger or equal to 120f/p.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-87

Chapter 4 Parameters|

05-01
Control
mode

Full-load Current of Motor 1
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Factory setting: #.##

FOCPG TQRPG

40 to 100%

This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30)

05-02
Control
mode

Rated Power of Motor 1
SVC

0 to 655.35 kW

It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.

05-03
Control
mode

Rated Speed of Motor 1 (rpm)
VFPG

SVC

Settings
	

Factory setting: #.##

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

Unit: 0.01

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1710 (60Hz, 4 poles)
1410 (50Hz, 4 poles)

0 to 65535

It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.

05-04
Control
mode

Number of Motor Poles 1
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

05-05

2 to 20

No-load Current of Motor 1
VFPG

Settings

4-88

Factory setting: 4

FOCPG TQRPG

It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

Control
mode

	

SVC

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: Amp
Factory setting: #.##

0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01

The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

05-06

Rotor Resistance R1 of Motor 1

Unit: 0.001

05-07

Rr of Motor 1

Unit: 0.001

Control
mode

SVC

Factory setting: #.###

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

0~65.535Ω

05-08

Lm of Motor 1

Unit: 0.1

05-09

Lx of Motor 1

Unit: 0.1

Control
mode

SVC

Settings
05-10
Control
mode

0~6553.5mH

Motor 1/Motor 2 Selection
VF

Settings

	

Factory setting: #.#

FOCPG TQRPG

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

1

Motor 1

2

Motor 2

It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.

05-11
Control
mode

Frequency for Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch
VF

VFPG

Settings
05-12
Control
mode

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00 to 600.00Hz

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Enable

05-30

Delay Time for Y-connection/Δ −connection

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00

Y-connection /Δ−connection Switch

Settings

	

Factory setting: 1

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Factory setting: 0

Unit: 0.001
Factory setting: 0.200

0 to 60.000

Pr.05-12 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/ Δ−connection Switch.
When Pr.05-12 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-11 setting and current motor frequency
to switch motor to Y-connection or Δ−connection. AT the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters (Pr.05-01 to 05-10/Pr.05-13 to Pr.05-21).

	

Pr.05-30 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/Δ −connection.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-89

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

When output frequency reaches Y-connection/Δ −connection switch frequency, drive will delay
by Pr.05-30 before multi-function output terminals are active.
Y-　 connection switch: can be used for wide range motor
Y connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
connection for high speed: higher torque can be used for high-speed drilling
connection is finished
Pr.02-01~06=30

U
MI1

V
W

Pr.02- 01~06=29

U

connection control

Y-connection is finished
MI2

RA

Pr.02- 11~14= 32

V

W

IM

Y connection control
MRA

Pr.02- 11~ 14= 31

X

Y

Z

Y-connection
confirmation input

If switch point is 60Hz,
the accel. switch point is 62Hz
Pr.05-11
Y-△ switch
frequency

Bandwidth is 2Hz

In this area, motor is in free
run status. AC motor drive
stops outputting.

Motor speed/
frequency

Motor speed will
decrease
by load inertia.

Pr. 05-30 Delay Time for Y-connection
/D -connection(Min. is 0.2 seconds)

Y-connection output

ON

Pr.02-11~14=31

ON

Y-conenction
confirmation input

ON

Pr.02-11~14=29

ON

△-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=32
△-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-11~14=30

4-90

Decel. switch point is 58Hz

ON
ON
: mechanical

bounce time

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

free run status

output
frequency
Y-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=31
Y-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-01~06=29
△-connection output
Pr.02-11~14=32
△-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-01~06=30
Y-△ switch error
frequency

ON
ON
ON

ON

delay time
Pr.05-30

05-13
Control
mode

Full-load Current of Motor 2
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

2 seconds

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1%
Factory setting: #.##

40 to 100%

This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10 and 25*120%=30)

05-14
Control
mode

Rated Power of Motor 2
SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

0 to 655.35

It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.

05-15
Control
mode

Rated Speed of Motor 2 (rpm)
VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: #.##

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1710

0 to 65535

It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-91

Chapter 4 Parameters|

05-16
Control
mode

Number of Motor Poles 2
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Factory setting: 4

FOCPG TQRPG

2 to 20

It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).

05-17
Control
mode

No-load Current of Motor 2
VFPG

SVC

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: Amp
Factory setting: #.##

0 to factory setting of Pr.05-01

The factory setting is 40% X rated current.

05-18

Rotor Resistance R1 of Motor 2

05-19

Rr of Motor 2

Control
mode

SVC

Unit: 0.001

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

Unit: 0.001

Factory setting: #.###

0~65.535Ω

05-20

Lm of Motor 2

Unit: 0.1

05-21

Lx of Motor 2

Unit: 0.1

Control
mode

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

Factory setting: #.#

0~6553.5mH

It will have different setting by the rated current.

05-22
Control
mode

Torque Compensation Time Constant
VF

VFPG

Settings
05-23
Control
mode

SVC

Unit: 0.001
Factory setting: 0.020

0.001 to 10.000 sec

Slip Compensation Time Constant
VFPG

Settings

Unit: 0.001
Factory setting: 0.100

SVC

0.001 to 10.000 sec

	

Setting Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 change the response time for the compensation.

	

When Pr.05-22 and Pr.05-23 are set to 10.00 seconds, its response time for the compensation
will be the longest. But if the settings are too short, unstable system may occur.

4-92

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

05-24
Control
mode

Torque Compensation Gain
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0

0 to10

This parameter may be set so that the AC motor drive will increase its voltage output to obtain
a higher torque. Only to be used for SVC control mode.

	

Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.

05-25
Control
mode

Slip Compensation Gain
VF

SVC

Settings
	

Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00

0.00 to10.00

When the asynchronous motor is driven by the drive, the load and slip will be increased. This
parameter can be used to correct frequency and lower the slip to make the motor can run near
the synchronous speed under rated current. When the output current is larger than the motor
no-load current, the drive will compensate the frequency by Pr.05-25 setting. If the actual
speed is slower than expectation, please increase the setting and vice versa.

	

It is only valid in SVC/VF mode.

	

The factory settings are:
A. In SVC mode, the factory setting is 1.00.
B. In VF mode, the factory setting is 0.00.

05-26
Control
mode

Slip Deviation Level
VFPG

SVC

Settings
05-27
Control
mode

Detection time of Slip Deviation
VFPG

05-28

Factory setting: 0

0 to 1000% (0: disable)

SVC

Settings

Control
mode

FOCPG

Unit: 1

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 1.0

0.0 to 10.0 sec

Over Slip Treatment
VFPG

Settings

SVC

FOCPG

0

Factory setting: 0

Warn and keep operation

1

Warn and ramp to stop

2

Warn and coast to stop

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-93

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

Pr.05-26 to Pr.05-28 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the
drive is running.

05-29
Control
mode

Hunting Gain
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 2000

SVC

0 to 10000 (0: disable)

The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, Pr.05-29 can be set to 0.
when the current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)

05-31
Control
mode

Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)
VF

VFPG

Settings
05-32
Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

00 to1439

Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
VF

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 00

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory setting: 00

FOCPG TQRPG

00 to 65535

Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 00 and time won’t be recorded when it is less than 60 seconds.

4-94

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 6 Protection Parameters
06-00

Low Voltage Level

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

VFPG

Unit: 0.1

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

230V series 160.0~220.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 180.0

460V series 320.0~440.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 360.0

It is used to set the Lv level.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00

LV

06-01

Over-Voltage Stall Prevention

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1

FOCPG TQRPG

230V series 350.0~450.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 380.0

460V series 700.0~900.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 760.0

0.0: disable (when brake resistor used)
	

During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to
motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value
again.

output
frequency

Deceleration characteristic
when Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention enabled
Frequency Held

previous
deceleration time

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

time

4-95

Chapter 4 Parameters|

06-02
Control
mode

Phase-loss Protection
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

0

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

Warn and keep operation

1

Warn and ramp to stop

2

Warn and coast to stop

It is used to set the phase-loss treatment. The phase-loss will effect driver’s control
characteristic and life.

06-03

Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 170

SVC

00~250%

During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
06-03
Over-Current
Detection
Level

current

Over-Current Stall
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held

Output
Frequency

time

actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled

06-04
Control
mode

Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 170

00 to 250%

If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower
than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set
frequency command value.

4-96

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
Over-Current
frequency decrease
Detection Level
Output Current
06-04

Output
Frequency
Time
over-current stall prevention during operation

06-05

Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

VFPG

Factory Setting: 0

SVC

0

by current accel/decel. time

1

by the 1st accel/decel. time

2

by the 2nd accel/decel. time

3

by the 3rd accel/decel. time

4

by the 4th accel/decel. time

5

by auto accel/decel. time

It is used to set the accel./decel. Time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant
speed.

06-06

Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

06-07
Control
mode

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Over-Torque detection disabled.

1

Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection

2

Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection

3

Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection

4

Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection

Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)
VF

VFPG

Factory Setting: 0

SVC

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150

4-97

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

10 to 250%

06-08

Over-torque Detection Time (OT1)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

06-09

Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
VF

VFPG

Settings

06-10

06-11

VF

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

0

Over-Torque detection disabled.

1

Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection

2

Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection

3

Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection

4

Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

VF

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150

10 to 250%

Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)

Settings
	

SVC

Over-torque Detection Level (OT2)

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 0.1

0.0 to 60.0 sec

Control
mode

Control
mode

Unit: 0.1

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.1

0.0 to 60.0 sec

Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 determine the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06-19) and also exceeds the Pr.06-08 Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code
“OT1/OT2” is displayed. If a Multi-Functional Output Terminal is to over-torque detection, the
output is on. Please refer to Pr.02-11~02-14 for details.

4-98

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

current

5%

Pr.06-07,
Pr.06-10

Pr.06-08, 06-11
06-12

Current Limit

Unit: 1

Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 150

Settings
	

0 to 250%

It is used to set the current limit.

06-13

Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling)

1

Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)

2

Disabled

06-27

Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

Factory Setting: 2

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 2

0

Operate with a Inverter Motor (forced external cooling)

1

Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)

2

Disabled

It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electrical
thermal relay to limit driver’s output power.

06-14

Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 60.0

30.0 to 600.0 sec

06-28

Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

Unit: 0.1

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 60.0

30.0 to 600.0 sec

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-99

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

The parameter is set by the output frequency, current and operation time of the drive for
activating the I2t electronic thermal protection function. The function will be activated for the
150% * setting current for the setting of Pr.06-14/Pr.06-28.
Operation
time(min)
5

60Hz or more
4

50Hz

3

10Hz
5Hz

2
1

Load
0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 factor (%)

06-15
Control
mode

Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning
VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 110.0 oC

Settings
06-16

Stall Prevention Limit Level

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 85.0

VFPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 50

SVC

0 to 100% (refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)

When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01, Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-28=80%:
Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = 06-03x06-28=150x80%=120%.
Stall Prevention Level at constant speed= 06-03x06-28=100x80%=80%.

06-17

Present Fault Record

06-18

Second Most Recent Fault Record

06-19

Third Most Recent Fault Record

06-20

Fourth Recent Fault Record

06-21

Fifth Most Recent Fault Record

06-22

Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings

0 to 65

Settings

4-100

Factory Setting: 0

VF

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Settings
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (B.B.)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
4-101

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings

VF
○

52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/Δ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Broken belt error (bEb)
65: Error PID feedback signal of tension (tdEv)

	

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○

It will record when the fault occurs and force stopping. For the Lv, it will record when it is
operation, or it will warn without record.

	

Setting 62: when DEB function is enabled, the drive will execute DEB and record to the Pr.0617 to Pr.06-22 simultaneously.

06-23

Fault Output Option 1

Unit: 1

06-24

Fault Output Option 2

Unit: 1

06-25

Fault Output Option 3

Unit: 1

06-26

Fault Output Option 4

Unit: 1

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)

These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-14 to 35-38)
for the specific requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be
activated (It needs to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Fault code

Bit1

Bit2

Bit3

Bit4

Bit5

Bit6

current Volt.

Bit0

OL

SYS

FBK

EXI

CE

0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration
(ocA)

●

2: Over-current during deceleration
(ocd)

●

3: Over-current during constant
speed (ocn)

●

4-102

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Fault code

Bit1

Bit2

Bit3

Bit4

Bit5

Bit6

current Volt.

Bit0

OL

SYS

FBK

EXI

CE

4: Ground fault (GFF)

●

5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)

●

6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)

●

7: Over-voltage during acceleration
(ovA)

●

8: Over-voltage during deceleration
(ovd)

●

9: Over-voltage during constant
speed (ovn)

●

10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)

●

11: Low-voltage during
acceleration (LvA)

●

12: Low-voltage during
deceleration (Lvd)

●

13: Low-voltage during constant
speed (Lvn)

●

14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)

●

15: Phase loss (PHL)

●

16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)

●

17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for
40HP above)

●

18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)

●

19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)

●

20: Fan error signal output

●

21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)

●

22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)

●

23: Motor 2 over-load (EoL2)

●

24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)

●

25: Fuse error (FuSE)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

●
●

4-103

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Fault code
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)

Bit1

Bit2

Bit3

Bit4

Bit5

Bit6

current Volt.

Bit0

OL

SYS

FBK

EXI

CE

●

28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)

●

31: Memory read-out error (cF2)

●

32: Isum current detection error
(cd0)

●

33: U-phase current detection error
(cd1)

●

34: V-phase current detection error
(cd2)

●

35: W-phase current detection
error (cd3)

●

36: Clamp current detection error
(Hd0)

●

37: Over-current detection error
(Hd1)

●

38: Over-voltage detection error
(Hd2)

●

39: Ground current detection error
(Hd3)

●

40: Auto tuning error (AuE)

●

41: PID feedback loss (AFE)

●

42: PG feedback error (PGF1)

●

43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)

●

44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)

●

45: PG slip error (PGF4)

●

46: PG ref input error (PGr1)

●

47: PG ref loss (PGr2)

●

48: Analog current input loss
(ACE)

●

49: External fault input (EF)
4-104

●
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Bit0

Fault code

Bit1

Bit2

Bit3

Bit4

Bit5

Bit6

current Volt.

OL

SYS

FBK

EXI

CE

50: Emergency stop (EF1)

●

51: External Base Block (B.B.)

●

52: Password error (PcodE)

●

53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)

●

55: Communication error (cE2)

●

56: Communication error (cE3)

●

57: Communication error (cE4)

●

58: Communication Time-out
(cE10)

●

59: PU time-out (cP10)

●

60: Brake transistor error (bF)

●

61: Y-connection/Δ-connection
switch error (ydc)

●

62: Decel. Energy Backup Error
(dEb)

●

63: Slip error (oSL)

●

64: Broken belt error (bEb)

●

65: Error PID feedback signal of
tension (tdEv)

●

06-29

PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

0

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and ramp to stop

2

Warn and coast to stop

It is used to set the treatment after detecting PTC.

06-30
Control
mode

PTC Level
VF

VFPG

Unit: 0.1
SVC

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 50.0

4-105

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
	

0.0 to 100.0%

It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input
value.

06-31
Control
mode

Filter Time for PTC Detection
VF

VFPG

Settings
06-32
Control
mode

06-33

Output Frequency for Malfunction
VF

VFPG

06-34

VFPG

06-35

06-36

VF

FOCPG TQRPG

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00~655.35 Amp

IGBT Temperature for Malfunction
VF

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.0~6553.5 V

Current Value for Malfunction

Settings

4-106

SVC

DC Voltage for Malfunction

Settings

Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0~6553.5 V

Settings

Control
mode

SVC

Output AC Voltage for Malfunction
VF

Factory Setting: 0.20

0.00 to 655.35 Hz

Settings

Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00 to 10.00 sec

Settings

Control
mode

SVC

Unit: 0.01

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0~6553.5 °C

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 7 Special Parameters
07-00

Software Brake Level

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

230V series 350.0~450.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 380.0

460V series 700.0~900.0Vdc

Factory Setting: 760.0

This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated.

07-01

DC Brake Current Level

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

0 to 100%

This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00-01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been attained.

	

When it is in FOCPG/TQRPG mode, it can enable DC brake function by setting to any value.

07-02
Control
mode

DC Brake Time during Start-up
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 60.0 sec

This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When
the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency
(Pr.01-05).

07-03

DC Brake Time during Stopping

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00 to 60.00 sec

This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping.

07-04

Start-Point for DC Brake

Control
mode

VF

Settings
	

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

VFPG

SVC

TQRPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00 to 600.00Hz

This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-107

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Output frequency

01-09
Minimum
output
frequency
Run/Stop

Start-point for
DC braking
time during
stopping

DC Braking Time
during Stopping

OFF

ON

Time

DC Braking Time

	

DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as
fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in
position before setting it in motion.

	

DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load
in position. For high inertia loads, a dynamic brake resistor may also be needed for fast
decelerations.

07-05
Control
mode

DC Brake Proportional Gain
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Factory Setting: 50

SVC

1 to 500Hz

It is used to set the output voltage gain when DC brake.

07-06

Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

Unit: 1

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Operation stops after momentary power loss.

1

Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the Master Frequency reference value.

2

Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the minimum frequency.

This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.

	

In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

07-07
Control
mode

4-108

Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time
VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 2.0

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
	

0.1 to 5.0 sec

If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will
resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive
output is then turned off (coast stop).

	

The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.

07-08

Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.5

FOCPG TQRPG

0.1 to 5.0 sec

When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7

Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
07-09
Current Limit for
Speed Search

Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
7 Frequency command before B.B.
Time

FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-109

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Output frequency
(H)

Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal

Output voltage
(V)

Waiting time 08.07

output current A
07-09 Current Limit
for Speed Search Speed

Speed Search
Synchronization speed detection
Time

FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart

Input B.B. signal
Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection

Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel.
FWD Run

Time

B.B.

B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart

07-09
Control
mode

Current Limit for Speed Search
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150

20 to 200%

Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation
only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.8-07. When the output current is
less than the value of Pr.8-07, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed
synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating
frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss.

	

When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum
current for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.

4-110

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

07-10

Base Block Speed Search

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

0

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

Stop operation

1

Speed search starts with last frequency command

2

Speed search starts with minimum output frequency

This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is
enabled.

	

In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

07-11

Auto Restart After Fault

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

0 to 10

Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be
reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.

	

Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 07-08 Base
Block Time for Speed Search.

07-12

Speed Search during Start-up

Control
mode

VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Speed search from maximum frequency

2

Speed search from start-up frequency

3

Speed search from minimum frequency

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take a long time to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does not
need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency.
The output current is set by the Pr.07-09.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-111

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically
by the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.

07-13

Decel. Time Selection for Momentary Power Loss (DEB function)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

1st decel. time

2

2nd decel. time

3

3rd decel. time

4

4th decel. time

5

Current decel. time

6

Auto decel. time

Factory Setting: 0

This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.

	
07-14

Control
mode

DEB Return Time
VF

Settings
	

SVC

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 25.0 sec

The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop
after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be
used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is
on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.

	

Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load

4-112

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
DC BUS voltage
it doesn't need
multi-function terminals

The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss

DEB return time

07-14

NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.

	

Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss
DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
DEB return time

07-14

NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to
prevent broken stitching when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the
AC motor drive to use DEB function with deceleration time via EF.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-113

Chapter 4 Parameters|

07-15
Control
mode

Dwell Time at Accel.
VF

VFPG

Settings
07-16
Control
mode

Control
mode

0.00 to 600.00 sec

VF

VFPG

Control
mode

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

FOCPG

0.00 to 600.00 Hz

Dwell Time at Decel.
VF

VFPG

Settings
07-18

FOCPG

Dwell Frequency at Accel.

Settings
07-17

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

FOCPG

0.00 to 600.00 sec

Dwell Frequency at Decel.
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

FOCPG

0.00 to 600.00 Hz

	

In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily.

	

Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency

07-16
Dwell
Frequency
07-15
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel.

07-17
Dwell Time
at Decel.

07-18
Dwell
Frequency
at Decel.
Time

Dwell at accel./decel.

07-19
Control
mode

Fan Control
VF

Settings

	

4-114

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

0

Fan always ON

1

1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF

2

AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and fan OFF

3

Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink temperature attained

4

Fan always OFF

This parameter is used for the fan control.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

07-20
Control
mode

Torque Command
TQRPG

Settings
	

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

-100.0 to 100.0%
(Pr. 07-22 setting=100%)

This parameter is torque command. When Pr.07-22 is 250% and Pr.07-20 is 100%, the actual
torque command = 250%X100% X motor rated torque.

07-21
Control
mode

Torque Command Source

Settings

	

07-22

Digital keypad

1

RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)

2

Analog signal (Pr.03-00)

Maximum Torque Command

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100

TQRPG

Settings

0 to 500%

This parameter is for the max. torque command (motor rated torque is 100%).

07-23
Control
mode

Filter Time of Torque Command

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.000

TQRPG

Settings
	

0

This parameter is torque command source and the torque command is in Pr.07-20.

Control
mode

	

Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0.000 to 1.000 sec

When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay.
When the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable.
User can adjust the setting by the control and response situation.

07-24

Speed Limit Selection

Control
mode

TQRPG

Settings

Factory Setting: 0
0

By Pr.07-25 and Pr.07-26

1

Frequency command source (Pr.00-20)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-115

Chapter 4 Parameters|

torque

torque

torque
frequency

07-25
07-26
Pr.07-24=0
Running/opposite running
direction are
limited by Pr.07-25
and Pr.07-26.

frequency

frequency

07-25
00-20
07-24=1
When it is reverse running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.07-25
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.00-20.

07-26
00-20
07-24=1
When it is forward running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.00-20
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.07-26.

07-25

Torque Mode +Speed Limit

Unit: 1

07-26

Torque Mode-Speed Limit

Unit: 1

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 10

TQRPG

Settings
	

0 to 120%

These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)

07-27
Control
mode

Source of Torque Offset
SVC

Settings

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Analog input (Pr.03-00)

2

Torque offset setting

3

Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31)

	

This parameter is the source of torque offset.

	

When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31
by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33).

02-01~02-06 is set to 31 02-01~02-06 is set to 32 02-01~02-06 is set to 33

4-116

Torque offset

OFF

OFF

OFF

None

OFF

OFF

ON

07-33

OFF

ON

OFF

07-32

OFF

ON

ON

07-33+07-32

ON

OFF

OFF

07-31

ON

OFF

ON

07-31+07-33

ON

ON

OFF

07-31+07-32

ON

ON

ON

07-31+07-32+07-33

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

07-28
Control
mode

Torque Offset Setting
SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

0.0 to 100.0%

This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.

07-29
Control
mode

High Torque Offset
SVC

Control
mode

Control
mode

0.0 to 100.0%

Middle Torque Offset
SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 20.0

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
07-31

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 30.0

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
07-30

0.0 to 100.0%

Low Torque Offset
SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 100.0%

When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-29, Pr.07-30 and Pr.07-31
by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.

07-32

Forward Motor Torque Limit

Unit: 1

07-33

Forward Regenerative Torque Limit

Unit: 1

07-34

Reverse Motor Torque Limit

Unit: 1

07-35
Control
mode

Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 200

FOCPG TQRPG

0 to 500%

The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35 will compare with Pr.0300=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit as shown in the
following figure.

	

According to the formula of motor rated torque:

02 and W(rad/s) is Pr.05-03.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

T ( N .M ) =

P(ω ) , where P(ω) is Pr.05W (rad / s)

RPM
= rad / s
60 × 2π

4-117

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Positive
torque
Forward motor mode
06-12 current limit

Reverse motor mode
06-12 current limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
7: positive torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit
9: regenerative torque limit

External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
7: positive torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit

Pr.07-35
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
speed

06-12 current limit
Reverse motor mode

External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
8: negative torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit

Negative
torque

06-12 current limit
Forward motor mode

Emergency Stop (EF) & Forced Stop Selection
VF

Settings

	

speed

Pr.07-33
Forward regenerative
torque limit

External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
8: negative torque limit
10: positive/negative torque limit

07-36

Pr.07-32
Forward motor
torque limit

Quadrant II Quadrant I
Quadrant III Quadrant IV

Pr.07-34
Reverse motor
torque limit

Control
mode

The level of torque limit will be
the min. value of following three values
1. torque limit of Pr.07-32 to Pr.07-35
2. Torque limit of external analog terminals
(AVI, ACI and AUI)
3. Pr.06-12 current limit

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Coast stop

1

By deceleration Time 1

2

By deceleration Time 2

3

By deceleration Time 3

4

By deceleration Time 4

5

System Deceleration

6

Automatic Deceleration

Factory Setting: 0

When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 18 and it is ON, the AC motor drive will be
operated by Pr.07-36.

4-118

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 8 High-function PID Parameters
08-00
Control
mode

Input Terminal for PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0

0

No function

1

Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)

2

Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)

3

Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)

4

Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)

5

Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)

6

Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)

Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.

	

Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.

08-01

Proportional Gain (P)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG

Factory Setting: 80.0

0.0 to 500.0%

This parameter determinates the gain of the feedback loop. If the gain is large, the response
will be strong and immediate (if the gain is too large, vibration may occur). If the gain is small,
the response will weak and slow.

08-02
Control
mode

Integral Gain (I)
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.01
FOCPG

Factory Setting: 1.00

0.00 to 100.00 sec

This parameter determines the speed of response for the PID feedback loop. If the integral
time is long, the response will be slow. If the integral time is short, the response will be quick.
Be careful not to set(I) too small, since a rapid response may cause oscillation in the PID loop.

	

If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-119

Chapter 4 Parameters|

08-03
Control
mode

Derivative Control (D)
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 0.01
FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00 to 1.00 sec

This parameter determines the damping effect for the PID feedback loop. If the differential time
is long, any oscillation will quickly subside. If the differential time is short, the oscillation will
subside slowly.

08-04
Control
mode

Upper limit for Integral Control
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0

0.0 to 100.0%

This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency.
The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) x (Pr.08-04).

08-05
Control
mode

PID Output Frequency Limit
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0

0.0 to 110.0%

This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.
This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency.

08-06
Control
mode

PID Offset
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-07
Control
mode

SVC

FOCPG

-100.0 to 100.0%

PID Delay Time
VF

Settings

4-120

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 2.5 sec

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Inp ut Selection of the
PID Targe ted Value
00-20:KPV-C E0 1/
RS485
03-00~0 2:UP/D own
ke y PG

1

PID Cancelled
08- 00=0
or 02- 01~ 06=21( pid off)

Output

2

+
PID offset
08-06
+
Display of th e PID fee dback
00- 14=1 0 display o f t he
PID feed back

-

Inp ut Selection
of the PID Fee dback
08- 00:AVI/ACI
AUI /PG

	

P

D

Pro po rtio n
ga in

Di ffere nti al
Time

08-01

08-03

I
08- 02
Int egral Time

+
+
PID
Delay
Time
08-07

08- 04
uppe r limit
for
Int egral

08-05
PID Freq.
out put
command
limit

Treatme nt o f t he
Feedback Signal Fau lt
If Hz>08 -05
time over0 8-08
=> 08- 09

PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated
entirely. To eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when
the PI control is utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes
and the constant external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will
delay the responding toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the
loading system that possesses the integral components.

	

PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation
load that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the
increment of the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be
decreasing as well. The control objects include occasions with integral component loads,
which are controlled by the P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is
functioning, the whole system will be vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P
action’s vibration subsiding and the system stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In
other words, this control is good for use with loadings with no brake functions over the
processes.

	

PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the
vibration, thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID
method could obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.

08-08

Feedback Signal Detection Time

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 0.1
4-121

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 3600.0 sec

This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback signal time.

	

If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.

08-09
Control
mode

Feedback Fault Treatment
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

FOCPG

0

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and RAMP to stop

2

Warn and COAST to stop

3

Warn and keep at last frequency

Factory Setting: 0

AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder)
feedback) are abnormal.

08-10
Control
mode

Sleep Frequency
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-11
Control
mode

Control
mode

VF

0.00 to 600.00Hz

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.01
FOCPG

VF

Factory Setting: 0.00

0.00 to 600.00Hz

Sleep Time

Settings
	

FOCPG

Wake-up Frequency

Settings
08-12

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

VFPG

Unit: 0.1
SVC

FOCPG

Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 to 6000.0sec

These parameters determine sleep functions of the AC drive. If the command frequency falls
below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then the drive will shut off the
output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr. 08-11. Please see the below
diagram.

4-122

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Frequency command

08-11

Wake-up frequency

actual output frequency

08-10

Sleep frequency
0Hz

sleep time
08-12

Sleep Function

08-13
Control
mode

PID Deviation Level
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-14
Control
mode

Control
mode

FOCPG

1.0 to 50.0%

PID Deviation Time
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-15

SVC

Unit: 0.1

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 5.0

FOCPG

0.1 to 300.0 sec

Filter Time for PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

0.1 to 300.0 sec

Reserved

08-17

Reserved

08-18

Reserved

08-19

Reserved

08-20

Reserved

08-21

Tension Control Selection
Settings

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 5.0

FOCPG

08-16

0 to 4
Settings

0: Disable
1: Closed-loop, speed mode
2: Line speed, speed mode
3: Reserved
4: Open-loop, torque mode

	

Factory Setting: 10.0

Factory Setting: 0

VF
○
○

Control Mode
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQRPG
○
○

○
○

○
○
○

Closed-loop, speed mode

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-123

Chapter 4 Parameters|

08-25
&
08-26

+

PID output frequenc y
08-35=0 *1

Limit

+

PI

-

+

08-35=1 *-1

08-29 & 08-30
08-32 & 08-33

08-27

08-23 & 08-24
mechanical gear r ati o
reel diameter
line speed

output
frequency

master fr equenc y

Mo tor

Mo tor

ten sio n feed back
AFM or DFM
o peratio n
com m and
freq uen cy
sett in g

AI

line sp eed in p ut

AI o r PG 2

o peratio n co m man d

MO= d1

F WD

F WD o rRE V

Drive 2

AI
Drive 1

	

Line speed, speed mode
08-23 or 08-24
mechanical gear r ati o A/B

08-42 reel diameter
08-25=2, line speed
08-26
command
line speed
08-27=1 feedback

master
frequency

+

frequency command

+
+

PI
08-36

08-29~08-30
08-32~08-33

-

08-25=2, 08- 26
line speed
command

08-27=1
line speed feedback

4-124

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Encoder
Motor

line speed
feedback
line speed
command

PG 2
AI or
communication
driv e

	

Open-loop, torque mode

Motor

tension
command

PG 1
AI
operation
command
F WD
torque c omm and
direc tion
MI=d39
line speed
input
AI or PG 2
(not i ndi spensable)
driv e

torque
compensation
08-83~08-86
tension
setting
08-76/08-79

tension
taper
08-81

torque
calc ul ation

torque
value

+

+

torque
command

reel diameter
08-42

08-42
reel diameter

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-125

Chapter 4 Parameters|

08-22
Control
mode

Wind Mode
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Rewind

1

Unwind

08-23

Mechanical Gear Ratio A

Unit: 1

08-24

Mechanical Gear Ratio B

Unit: 1

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Factory Setting: 100

FOCPG TQRPG

1 to 65535
Application without Encoder
Driv er

mechanical
gear ratio A

1:10

Load

Gear ratio
10:1

08-25
Control
mode

Source of the Tension Command/Line Speed
VF

VFPG

Settings

08-26
Control
mode

SVC

0

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

Parameter setting (Pr.08-26)

1

RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-26)

2

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 14 PID target value of
tension, 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)

PID Target Value of Tension/Line Speed
VF

Settings
	

Motor
mechanical
gear ratio B

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 50.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 100.0%

The setting range is from 0.0 to 100.0%. In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 1 (Closedloop, speed mode), the corresponding value for 100% of dancer is 10V.
In tension mode, when Pr.08-21 is set to 2 (Line speed, speed mode), the corresponding value
for 100% of line speed is max. line speed (Pr.08-38).

08-27
4-126

Source of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

08-28
Control
mode

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 11 PID feedback of tension)

1

Pulse input (Pr.08-40)

Auto-tuning Tension PID
VF

Settings

	

SVC

VFPG

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Reel diameter (08-29~08-31corresponds to 08-44, 08-32~08-34
corresponds to 08-43)

2

Frequency (08-29~08-31 corresponds to 01-07, 08-32~08-34
corresponds to 01-00)

When Pr.08-28 is set to 1:

P.I.D
08-29
08-30

08-32
08-33
0 Dmin
08-44
	

Dmax
08-43

reel
diameter

When Pr.08-28 is set to 2:

P.I.D
08-29
08-30

08-32
08-33
0 F min
01-07
08-29

Tension PID P1

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

F max
01-00

output
frequency

Unit: 0.1

4-127

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
08-30
Control
mode

08-32
Control
mode

Tension PID I1
VF

VFPG

08-33

Unit: 0.01
SVC

Tension PID P2
VF

VFPG

VF

VFPG

Unit: 0.01
SVC

VF

VFPG

Settings

FOCPG TQRPG

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Positive output

1

Negative output

Tension/Line Speed PID Output Limit
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 20.00

FOCPG TQRPG

0 to 100.00% (according to Pr.01-00)

Source of Line Speed Input Command
VF

Settings

4-128

Factory Setting: 1.00

0.00 to 500.00 sec

PID Output Status

08-37

FOCPG TQRPG

Tension PID I2

08-35

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 50.0

0.0 to 1000.0

Reserved

08-36

Unit: 0.1

SVC

08-34

Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

Reserved

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 1.00

0.00 to 500.00 sec

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 50.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 1000.0

Settings
08-31

SVC

VFPG

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 12 line speed)

2

RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-41)
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

3

Pulse input (Pr.08-40)

4

DFM-DCM pulse input (Pr.02-18)

When it is set to 1, 3 or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog and
pulse command. When it is set to 2, it can change the setting of Pr.08-41 (current line speed)
via communication.

	

When it is set to 3 or 4, pulse signal needs to be connected to PG2 of the PG card and then
set the PG type by Pr.10-15.

	
	

When it is set to 3, it needs to use with Pr.08-40.
When it is set to 4, Pr.02-18 setting needs to be set to the DFM output value of previous driver
as shown in the following before setting Pr.08-38.
tractor

Wind

the setting of P r,02-18 of motor 2
= the setti ng of Pr.02-18 of m otor 1
motor

motor
Pr.10- 15 of motor 2
should be set to 3 or 4

D riv er 1

Driv er 2

TP

PG 2
A2
TP
/A2
B2
/B2
DCM AB2

DF M
(02-18)
DFM
DCM

08-38
Control
mode

Max. Line Speed
VF

Settings
08-39

VFPG

Unit: 0.1
SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 1000.0

0.0 to 3000.0 m/min

Min. Line Speed

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 0.1

4-129

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
08-40
Control
mode

08-41

Pulse Number for Each Meter
VF

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 6000.0

Current Line Speed
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Factory Setting: 0.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 3000.0 m/min

Settings

Control
mode

SVC

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 to 3000.0 m/min

When Pr.08-37 is set to 1, 3, or 4, the current line speed will be saved into Pr.08-41 via analog
and pulse command. At this time, Pr.08-41 will be read only.

	

When Pr.08-37 is set to 2, the setting of Pr.08-41(current line speed) can be changed by
communication.

08-42
Control
mode

Source of Reel Diameter
VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

0

Calculated by line speed

1

Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on reel shaft)(Pr.0849~51, Pr.10-15)

2

Calculated by integrating thickness (encoder is on motor)(Pr.0823~08-24, 08-50~08-51, 10-00~10-01)

3

Calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set to 13)

	

When it is set to 1 or 2, it needs to be used with PG card.

	

When it is set to 1, the reel diameter can be got from the encoder on the reel shaft. At this time,
the pulse signal needs to be connected to the PG2 of PG card and get the reel diameter from
the settings of Pr.10-15, Pr.08-49, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51.

	

When it is set to 2, the reel diameter can be calculated from the motor encoder and gear ratio.
At this time, the pulse signal should be connected to the PG1 of the PG card and get the reel
diameter from the settings of Pr.08-23, Pr.08-24, Pr.10-01, Pr.10-00, Pr.08-50 and Pr.08-51.

	

When it is set to 3, the reel diameter can be calculated by analog input (Pr.03-00~03-02 is set
to 13) and the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43.

4-130

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

the path when
Pr.08- 42 is set to 1
proxi mity
switch/
encoder
gear ratio

08-43
Control
mode

08-44

VFPG

08-45

Encoder

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 6000.0

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 1.0

1 to 6000.0mm

Source of Reel Diameter
VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

RS-485 communication setting (Pr.08-46)

1

Analog input (Pr.03-00-Pr.03-02 is set to 13)

Factory Setting: 0

When it is set to 1, the corresponding value of 10V is Pr.08-43.

08-46
Control
mode

Initial Reel Diameter
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Motor

Empty Reel Diameter
VF

Settings

	

the path when
Pr.08- 42 is set to 2

1.0 to 6000.0mm

Settings

Control
mode

Driv er

Max. Reel Diameter
VF

Settings

Control
mode

Chapter 4 Parameters|

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 1.0

1.0 to 6000.0mm

When Pr.08-45 is set to 1, Pr.08-46 will be read-only.

08-47

Initial Reel Diameter 1

08-48

Initial Reel Diameter 2

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 1.0

1.0 to 6000.0mm

	

Pr.08-46 needs to be used by setting 44~46 to Pr.02-01~02-06, Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30.

	

When you need to have many types of reel diameter, please set Pr.08-46 to 0.

08-49

Number of Pulse Per Revolution

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 1
4-131

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
08-50
Control
mode

08-51

Coil Number for Each Layer
VF

VFPG

08-52

VF

VFPG

08-53

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0.001 to 60.000mm

Filter Time of Reel Diameter
VF

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00

FOCPG TQRPG

0.00 to 100.00 sec

Auto Compensation of Reel Diameter
VF

VFPG

Settings

08-54
Control
mode

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Enable

Current Reel Diameter
VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0

FOCPG TQRPG

1.0 to 6000.0 mm

When the AC motor drive is not at STOP, this parameter is read-only.

08-55
Control
mode

Smart Start
VF

VFPG

Settings

08-56
Control
mode
4-132

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 1.000

This parameter can be used to improve unstable of the source of reel diameter(Pr.08-42).

Control
mode

	

FOCPG TQRPG

Material Thickness

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 1

1 to 10000

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 1

FOCPG TQRPG

1 to 10000ppr

Settings

Control
mode

SVC

SVC

0

Disable

1

Enable

2

In unwind mode, rewind in reverse direction

Switch Level for Smart Start and PID Function
VF

VFPG

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 15.0

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
08-57
Control
mode

0.0~100.0% (according to Pr.08-26)

Frequency for Smart Start
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-58
Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

Accel. Time for Smart Start
VF

Factory Setting: 2.00

0.00~600.00Hz

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 1

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 3.00

0.01~600.00 sec

When the speeds of wider/unwinder and tractor can’t match at start-up, the situation can be
improved by setting Pr.08-57 and Pr.08-58.

08-59
Control
mode

Broken Belt Detection
VF

VFPG

Settings

08-60
Control
mode

08-61

VF

VFPG

08-62

Disable

1

Enable

SVC

FOCPG

Allowance Error of Line Speed of Broken Belt Detection
VF

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

VF

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0

1.0~6000.0 mm

Detection Time of Broken Belt

Settings
	

0

Factory Setting: 0

0.0~3000.0 m/min

Settings

Control
mode

FOCPG

Min. Line Speed of Broken Belt Detection

Settings

Control
mode

SVC

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.00

0.00~100.00 sec

When the broken belt detection is enabled, line speed is higher then Pr.08-61, allowance error
of line speed of broken belt detection exceeds Pr.08-61 and detection time of broken belt
exceeds Pr.08-62, the broken belt occurs.

08-63

Allowance Error Level of Tension/Line Speed PID Feedback

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 1
4-133

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Factory Setting: 100

FOCPG

0~100%

The corresponding value for the 100% of dancer is 10V.

08-64
Control
mode

Allowance Error Detection Time of Tension PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-65
Control
mode

SVC

FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.5

0.0~10.0 sec

Error Treatment of Tension PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

SVC

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG

0

Warn and keep operation

1

Warn and coast to stop

2

Warn and ramp to stop

When the error of tension PID target value and tension PID feedback exceeds Pr.08-63 and
the allowance error detection time of tension PID exceeds Pr.08-64, tension PID feedback
error occurs. Refer to Pr.08-65 for error treatment of tension PID feedback.

08-66
Control
mode

Upper Limit of Tension PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

Settings
08-67
Control
mode

SVC

Lower Limit of Tension PID Feedback
VF

VFPG

SVC

Reserved

08-69

DFM Selection
VFPG

Settings

08-70
Control
mode

4-134

FOCPG TQRPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Output frequency

1

Frequency command

Low-pass Filter Time of Line Speed
VF

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0~100.0%

08-68

VF

Factory Setting: 100.0

0.0~100.0%

Settings

Control
mode

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings

0.00~100.00 sec

08-71
|
08-75

Reserved

08-76

Source of Tension Setting

Control
mode

Settings

08-77
Control
mode

08-78

08-79

08-80

08-81

Factory Setting: 0
0 ~30000 N
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
0 ~30000 N

Source of Zero-speed Tension Setting
Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0

Disable

1

Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-80)

2

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 16 zero-speed tension)
(Pr.08-80)

Setting of Zero-speed Tension

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0 ~30000 N

Source of Tension Taper
Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

Settings

08-82

Unit: 1

Tension Setting

Settings

Control
mode

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 15 tension setting) (Pr.08-78)

TQRPG

Settings

Control
mode

Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-78)

1

TQRPG

Settings

Control
mode

0

Max. Tension

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0

Communication RS-485 (Pr.08-82)

1

Analog input (Pr. 03-00~03-02 is set to 17 tension taper) (Pr.08-82)

Tension Taper

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Unit: 1
4-135

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

Settings
08-83
Control
mode

08-84

08-85

08-86
Control
mode

4-136

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0~30000

Torque Feed Forward Gain

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 50.0

TQRPG

0.0~100.0%

Low Pass Filter Time of Torque Feed Forward

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 5.00

TQRPG

Settings
08-87
|
08-99

0.0~100.0%

Compensation Coefficient of Material Inertial

Settings

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0.0

TQRPG

Settings

Control
mode

0~100%

Friction Compensation

Settings

Control
mode

Factory Setting: 0

TQRPG

0.00~100.00

Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 9: Communication Parameters
There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-11 near to the control terminals. The pins are
defined below:
1: EV
2: GND
3: SG4: SG+
5: Reserved
1 6: Reserved
6
Each VFD-VE AC drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09-00. The
RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.
09-00
Control
mode

Communication Address
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 1

1 to 254

If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.

09-01

COM1 Transmission Speed

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 9.6

4.8 to 115.2kbps

This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.

09-02
Control
mode

COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment
VF

Settings

	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and RAMP to stop

2

Warn and COAST to stop

3

No warning and keep operating

Factory Setting: 3

This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-137

Chapter 4 Parameters|

09-03

COM1 Time-out Detection

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

SVC

Settings
	

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 ~ 100.0 sec (0.0 disable)

If Pr.09-03 is not set to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.

09-04
Control
mode

COM1 Communication Protocol
VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

Factory Setting: 1

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>

1

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>

2

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>

3

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>

4

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>

5

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>

6

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,1>

7

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,2>

8

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,1>

9

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,1>

10

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,2>

11

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,2>

12

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>

13

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>

14

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>

15

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>

16

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>

17

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>

	
1. Control by PC or PLC
A VFD-VE can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following modes:
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09-04.
Code Description:
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:
64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
4-138

‘7’
37H

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Character
ASCII code

‘8’
38H

‘9’
39H

‘A’
41H

‘B’
42H

‘C’
43H

‘D’
44H

‘E’
45H

‘F’
46H

RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64
Hex.
	
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
( 7.N.2)

Start
bit

0

1

2

3

5

4

Stop Stop
bit
bit

6

7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.E.1)

Start
bit

0

1

3

2

4

5

Even Stop

6

parity bit

7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Start
bit

0

1

2

3

4

5

Odd

6

Stop

parity bit

7-bit character
10-bit character frame

11-bit character frame (For RTU):
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Stop Stop
bit
bit

6

7

Even Stop
parity bit

6

7

8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Start
bit

0

1

2

3

4

5

8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Start
bit

0

1

2

3

4

5

Odd

Stop

parity bit

8-bit character
11-bit character frame

3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes

4-139

Chapter 4 Parameters|

DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
END Lo

Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)

RTU mode:
START

A silent interval of more than 10 ms

Address

Communication address: 8-bit address

Function

Command code: 8-bit command

DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END

Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=16
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms

3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
10H: write multiple registers
The available function codes and examples for VFD-VE are described as follows:
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘0’
Address
Address
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Function
Function
‘3’
‘3’
Number of data
Starting data
‘2’
‘0’
(Count by byte)
address
‘4’
‘1’
4-140

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Command message:

Number of data
(count by word)
LRC Check
END

Response message:
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘D’
‘7’
CR
LF

Content of starting
address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END

‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF

RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High

01H
03H
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H

Response message:
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High

01H
03H
04H
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH

(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘0’
Address
Address
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Function
Function
‘6’
‘6’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
Data address
Data address
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
Data content
Data content
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘7’
‘7’
LRC Check
LRC Check
‘1’
‘1’
CR
CR
END
END
LF
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Function
Data address
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Response message:
01H
06H
01H

Address
Function
Data address

01H
06H
01H
4-141

Chapter 4 Parameters|

00H
17H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low
86H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
22H
CRC CHK High
(3) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.05-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Data content

Command message:
STX
‘:’
Address 1
‘0’
Address 0
‘1’
Function 1
‘1’
Function 0
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
Starting data
address
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
(count by word)
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
Number of data
(count by byte)
‘4’
‘1’
‘3’
The first data
content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data
content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF

00H
17H
70H
86H
22H

Response message:
STX
‘:’
Address 1
‘0’
Address 0
‘1’
Function 1
‘1’
Function 0
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
Starting data
address
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
(count by word)
‘0’
‘2’
‘E’
LRC Check
‘8’
CR
END
LF

RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
01H
Function
10H
Starting data
05H
address
00H
Number of data
00H’
(count by word)
02H
Number of data
04
(count by byte)
13H
The first data
content
88H
The second data
0FH
4-142

Response message:
Address
01H
Function
10H
Starting data address
05H
00H
Number of data
00H
(count by word)
02H
CRC Check Low
41H
CRC Check High

04H

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

content

A0H

CRC Check Low

‘9’

CRC Check High

‘A’

3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of the
bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the 2’scomplement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0

‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
Starting data address
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
‘0’
‘1’
LRC Check 1
‘F’
LRC Check 0
‘6’
END 1
CR
END 0
LF
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
RTU mode:
01H
Address
Function
03H
Starting data address

21H
02H
Number of data
00H
(count by word)
02H
CRC CHK Low
6FH
CRC CHK High
F7H
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right
with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat
step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete
8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until
all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-143

Chapter 4 Parameters|

transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be
swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content

Address

AC drive
Parameters

GGnnH

Command
Write only

2000H

Command
Write only

2000H

Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number,
for example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Referencing to
chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can
be read at one time.
0: No function
1: Stop
Bit 0-3
2: Run
3: Jog + Run
00B: No function
01B: FWD
Bit 4-5
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
10B: 3rd accel/decel
11B: 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11
Represented 16 step speeds.
Bit 12

0: No comm. multi step speed or accel/decel
time
1: Comm. multi step speed or accel/decel time

Bit 13~14

2001H
4-144

00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
02B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting
03B: change operation source
Bit 15
Reserved
Frequency command
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Content

Address
2002H
2100H

Status
monitor
Read only

2119H

2102H
2103H
2104H
2105H
2106H
2107H
2109H
2116H
211AH
211BH
211CH
2200H
2203H
2204H
2205H
2206H
2207H

Function
Bit 0
1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1
1: Reset
Bit 2
1: B.B. ON
Bit 3-15
Reserved
Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
Bit 0
1: FWD command
Bit 1
1: Operation status
Bit 2
1: Jog command
Bit 3
1: REV command
Bit 4
1: REV command
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
Bit 8
interface
Bit 9
1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
Bit 10
communication interface
Bit 11
1: Parameters have been locked
Bit 12
1: enable to copy parameter from keypad
Bit 13-15 Reserved
Frequency command (F)
Output frequency (H)
Output current (AXXX.X)
DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
Output voltage (EXXX.X)
Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
Counter value
Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
Setting frequency (F)
Max. setting frequency
Max. output frequency
Feedback Signal (XXX.XX %)
AVI analog input (XXX.XX %)
ACI analog input (XXX.XX %)
AUI analog input (XXX.XX %)
Display temperature of IGBT (oC)
Display temperature of heatsink (oC)

3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode:
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

RTU mode:
4-145

Chapter 4 Parameters|

STX
Address Low
Address High
Function Low
Function High
Exception code
LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High
END 1
END 0

‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF

Address
Function
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High

01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H

The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
Explanation
code
Illegal function code:
01
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data address:
02
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data value:
03
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
Slave device failure:
04
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no
10
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
3.7 Communication program of PC:
The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus ASCII mode
on a PC by C language.
#include
#include
#include
#include
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */
/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'};
void main(){
int i;
4-146

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08);
/* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01);
/* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
/* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06);
/* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH, <7,O,1>=0AH,
<8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */
for(i=0;i<=16;i++){
while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]);
/* send data to THR */ }
i=0;
while(!kbhit()){
if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */
} } }
09-05

COM2 Transmission Speed (Keypad)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 9.6

4.8 to 115.2kbps

This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.

09-06

COM2 Transmission Fault Treatment (Keypad)

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

	

SVC

0

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and RAMP to stop

2

Warn and COAST to stop

3

No warning and keep operating

Factory Setting: 3

This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.

09-07
Control
mode

COM2 Time-out Detection (Keypad)
VF

VFPG

SVC

Settings
	

FOCPG TQRPG

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0

0.0 ~ 100.0 sec

If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.

09-08

COM2 Communication Protocol (Keypad)

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

0

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>

1

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Factory Setting: 13

4-147

Chapter 4 Parameters|

09-09
Control
mode

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>

3

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>

4

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>

5

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>

6

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,1>

7

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,2>

8

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,1>

9

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,1>

10

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,2>

11

Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,2>

12

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>

13

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>

14

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>

15

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>

16

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>

17

Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>

Response Delay Time
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

2

SVC

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 2.0

FOCPG TQRPG

0.0 ~ 200.0 msec

This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS

PC or PLC command
Handling time
of the AC drive

09-10
Control
mode

Transmission Master Frequency
VF

Settings
	

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Response Delay Time
Pr.09-09

Response Message
of the AC Drive

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00

0.00 ~ 600.00 Hz

When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After repower on, it will with the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if there is no new frequency command.

09-11

Block Transfer 1

Unit: 1

09-12

Block Transfer 2

Unit: 1

09-13

Block Transfer 3

Unit: 1

4-148

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

09-14

Block Transfer 4

Unit: 1

09-15

Block Transfer 5

Unit: 1

09-16

Block Transfer 6

Unit: 1

09-17

Block Transfer 7

Unit: 1

09-18

Block Transfer 8

Unit: 1

09-19

Block Transfer 9

Unit: 1

09-20

Block Transfer 10

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings
	

SVC

Unit: 1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 0

0 to 65535

There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to
Pr.09-20). User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want
to read.

09-21

Multi-function Output Status

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

Factory Setting: Read-only

0 to 65535

09-22

AFM2 Status

Control
mode

VF

VFPG

Settings

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: Read-only

FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: Read-only

0 to 4095

09-23

AFM3 Status

Control
mode

VF

Settings

FOCPG TQRPG

VFPG

SVC

0 to 4095

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-149

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 10 PID Control
10-00 Encoder Pulse
Control
mode

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 600

VFPG FOCPG TQRPG

1 to 20000 (Max=20000 for 2-pole motor)

A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.

10-01

Encoder Input Type Setting

Control
mode

VFPG FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

Factory Setting: 0

0

Disable

1

Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
A
B

2

Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
A
B

3

Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B

4

Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B

5

Single-phase input
A

	

4-150

It is helpful for the stable control by inputting correct pulse type.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

10-02
Control
mode

PG Feedback Fault Treatment
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG

Settings

10-03
Control
mode

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and RAMP to stop

2

Warn and COAST to stop

Detection Time for PG Feedback Fault
VFPG FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

0

Factory Setting: 2

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00

0.00 to 10.00 sec

When PG loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for PG feedback fault (Pr.10-03), the PG signal error will occur. Refer to the
Pr.10-02 for PG feedback fault treatment.

10-04
Control
mode

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1
VFPG FOCPG

Settings
10-05
Control
mode

10-06
Control
mode

10-07

Control
mode

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10

VFPG FOCPG

0 to 40Hz

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.100

VFPG FOCPG

0.000 to 10.000 sec

ASR 1/ASR2 Switch Frequency

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 7.00

VFPG FOCPG

Settings
	

0.000 to 10.000 sec

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 2

Settings
10-08

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.100

VFPG FOCPG

Settings

Control
mode

0 to 40 Hz

ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1

Settings

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10

5.00 o 600.00Hz

ASR P determines Proportional control and associated gain (P). ASR I determines integral
control and associated gain (I).

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-151

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

When integral time is set to 0, it is disabled. Pr.10-08 defines the switch frequency for the
ASR1 (Pr.10-04, Pr.10-05) and ASR2 (Pr.10-06, Pr.10-07).
PI
10-06
10-07
10-04
10-05
10-21
10-22
5Hz

5Hz

0Hz

	

Hz

10-08

When using multi-function input terminals to switch ASR1/ASR2, the diagram will be shown as
follows.
Setting multi-function input terminal to 27
(ASR1/ASR2 switch)

OFF

ON

ASR 1

ASR 2
0.1 sec

10-09
Control
mode

ASR Primary Low Pass Filter Gain

	

0.1 sec

Unit: 0.001

0.000 to 0.350 sec

It defines the filter time of the ASR command.

10-10
Control
mode

PG Stall Level

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 115

VFPG FOCPG

Settings
	

ASR 1

Factory Setting: 0.008

FOCPG

Settings

OFF

0 to 120% (0: disable)

This parameter determines the maximum PG feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)

10-11
Control
mode

PG Stall Detection Time
VFPG FOCPG

Settings
10-12
Control
mode
4-152

0.0 to 2.0 sec

PG Slip Range
VFPG FOCPG

Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.1

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 50

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
10-13
Control
mode

0 to 50% (0: disable)

PG Slip Detection Time

10-14

0.0 to 10.0 sec

PG Stall and Slip Error Treatment
Factory Setting: 2

VFPG FOCPG

Settings

	

Factory Setting: 0.5

VFPG FOCPG

Settings

Control
mode

Unit: 0.1

0

Warn and keep operating

1

Warn and RAMP to stop

2

Warn and COAST to stop

When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-12 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-13 or motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting, it will start to accumulate time.
If detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, the PG feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-14
PG stall and slip error treatment.

10-15

Pulse Input Type Setting

Control
mode

VF

Settings

VFPG

SVC

0

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG TQRPG

Disable
Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
FWD

1

REV

A
B

Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
FWD

2

REV

A
B

Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD

3

REV

A
B

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-153

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
FWD

4

REV

A
B

10-16
Control
mode

Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator)
VFPG

Factory Setting: 1

FOCPG TQRPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1

1 to 255

This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division. For example, when it is
set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be 1024/2=512ppr.

10-17
Control
mode

PG Electrical Gear A (Channel 1 of PG card)
VFPG

FOCPG

Settings
10-18
Control
mode

1 to 5000

PG Electrical Gear B (Channel 2 of PG card)
VFPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100

FOCPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100

1 to 5000

Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-00) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG
Electrical Gear B.

10-19
Control
mode

PG Position Control Point (Home)
VFPG

Settings
	

4-154

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG

0 to 20000

This parameter determines the home position in the position control.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

10-20
Control
mode

Range for PG Position Attained (Home range)
VFPG

FOCPG

Settings
	

0 to 20000

This parameter determines the Home position attained in the position control mode.

10-21
Control
mode

P Gain of Zero Speed
VFPG

10-22
Control
mode

0 to 40Hz

I Gain of Zero Speed
VFPG

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.100

FOCPG

Settings

0.000 to 10.000 sec

This parameter determines zero speed command gain in speed control.

10-23
Control
mode

Feed Forward Gain of APR

10-24
Control
mode

0 to 100

Decelerate Time of Position

10-25

0.00 to 600.00 sec/0.0 to 6000.0 sec

Max. Frequency for Resolution Switch
VF

Settings

Unit: 0.01/0.1
Factory Setting: 3.00/3.0

VFPG FOCPG

Settings

Control
mode

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 30

VFPG FOCPG

Settings

	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10

FOCPG

Settings

	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10

VFPG

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 50.00

50.00 to 600.00Hz

This function is used to enhance the function of unstable speed/position due to insufficient
resolution of analog simulation value. It needs to use with external input terminals (one of
Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-06/Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-30 should be set to 43).

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-155

Chapter 4 Parameters|
AUI +10V
AUI 0V
Max. output frequency
Pr.01-00

AUI -10V

Resolution switch frequency
Pr.10-25

Output
frequency
0Hz
Max. waiting time for
frequency switch

Max. waiting time for
frequency switch

Resolution switch
Pr.02-11~02-14=43
Reverse running

Forward running

10-26

Reserved

10-27

PG Mechanical Gear A1

Unit: 1

10-28

PG Mechanical Gear B1

Unit: 1

10-29

PG Mechanical Gear A2

Unit: 1

10-30

PG Mechanical Gear B2

Control
mode

VFPG

Settings

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100

FOCPG TQRPG

1 to 65535

Driver
Gear ratio A1/A2
Load
Encoder is used
at load side

4-156

1:10
Gear ratio
10:1

Motor
Gear ratio B1/B2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-20
+

+

P

+
+

+

-

10-09
tor que limit
07-32~07-35
no of fs et
by anal og input (Pr.03-00)
TQBias
t or que off set s et ting
controlled by ext ernal terminals (Pr.07-29 to Pr. 07-31)

I
10-04
10-05
10-06 and 10-07
10-21
10-22

07-27
01-01
01-02
05-01~09
IGBT
&
PWM

current
limit

f lux weakening c urv e

c urr ent
measure

M
10-00
10-01

current f eedback

actual frequenc y
Control Di agram f or the Vecto r + Torque
no offset
by a na lo g in put (Pr.0 3-0 0)
to rq ue offset settin g
c ontr ol le d b y e xtern al te rmi na ls ( Pr.0 7- 29 to Pr.0 7-3 1)

+
tor que co mman d
07 -2 1

+
06-12

07 -2 4 o r 0 0-2 0
sp eed l imi t or com mand

+

-

+

P

07-23

+
+

tor que l imi t
07 -3 2~07- 35

10-09

sp eed to rqu e
mod e swi tch

I
10-05
10-04
10-06 and 10-07
10-22
10-21

01-01
01-02
05-01~ 09

Cu rre nt
con tr ol
flu x w ea ken in g cu rve

Cur ren t
mea sur e

IGBT
&
PWM

M
10-00
10-01

Cu rre nt fe edb ac k

ac tu al fre qu enc y

Con trol Diag ram fo r the To rqu e + Encoder

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-157

Chapter 4 Parameters|

RUN

RUN/STOP
multi-function input
OFF
terminal is set to 26
(torque/speed mode switch)
03-00~03=1
speed
(AVI/AUI/ACI is
frequency command) command
03-00~03=2
(AVI/AUI/ACI
is torque command)

Control mode

torque
limit

speed
control

ON
speed limit

torque
command

torque
command

OFF

speed
command
torque
limit

speed
control

STOP

ON
speed limit

torque
command

torque
command

speed control
(decelerate to stop)

Torque Control/Speed Control Switch Timing
(00-10=3/4, multi-function input terminal is set to 26)

4-158

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Group 11 Advanced Parameters
11-00
Control
mode

System Control

Settings

	

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG

Bit 0

ASR Auto tuning

Bit 1

Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)

Bit 2

Zero Servo

Bit 3

Reserved

Bit 4

Enable gain adjustment of position loop KP

Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting and Pr. 10-04~10-07, 10-21~10-22 will be invalid.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.

Estimate Jm value

NO

YES

Setting auto gain adjustment
Pr.11-00=1
Adjust Pr.11-02, 11-03 and 11-11
separately by speed response
Adjust by requirement
Pr.11-04 (PDFF function)

Adjust gain value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 (factory setting)
Adjust Pr.10-04, 10-05, 10-06,
10-07, 10-21 and 10-22
separatelyby speed response
Adjust by requirement
Pr.10-09 (for general,
no need to adjust)

Adjust by requirement
Pr.10-08
(ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency)
Adjust by requirement
Pr.07-32~35 (torque limit)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-159

Chapter 4 Parameters|
PI

PI

10-06
10-07

11-03

11-02

10-04
10-05
10-21
10-22

5Hz

0Hz

5Hz

10-08

Pr.11-11
use to adjust the
strength of zeroservo lock
Hz

PI adjustment-manual gain

11-01
Control
mode

0Hz

5Hz

5Hz

Hz

10-08

PI adjustment-auto gain

Per Unit of System Inertia

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 400

FOCPG

Settings
	

1. Pr. 11-01 value
2. set Pr.11-00 to 1

1 to 65535 (256=1PU)

To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to 2 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.

11-02
Control
mode

Low-speed Bandwidth
FOCPG

Settings
11-03
Control
mode

11-11
Control
mode

0 to 40Hz

Zero-speed Bandwidth
VFPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10

FOCPG

Settings
	

0 to 40Hz

High-speed Bandwidth

Settings

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 10

0 to 40Hz

After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to 1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters Pr.1102, 11-03 and 11-11 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.10-08 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.

11-04
Control
mode

PDFF Gain Value
FOCPG

Settings

4-160

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 30

0 to 200%

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

	

After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-04 to reduce overshoot.
Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.

	

Besides traditional PI control, it also provides PDFF function to reduce overshoot for speed
control.
1. Get Pr.11-01 value
2. Set Pr.11-00 to 1
3. Adjust Pr.11-04 (the larger number is set and the suppressed overshoot function will be
better. But it needs to be used by the actual condition)

PI

PDFF

It is recommended to disable
this function (Pr.11-04=0) for
Y/ connection switch and
ASR1/ASR2 switch application.

11-05
Control
mode

Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1

	
	

Factory Setting: 90

FOCPG

Settings

Unit: 1

0 to 200%

It is used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-05 (motor 1) or Pr.11-06 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach
motor rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-161

Chapter 4 Parameters|

N-m

Flux Weakening Curve

11-05/11-06
Fbase
11-06
Control
mode

Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2
FOCPG

11-07

0 to 200%

Detection Time for Phase-loss
VF

VFPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 90

Settings

Control
mode

Hz

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.20

0.01 to 600.00 sec

When the phase-loss occurs and exceeds this detection time, the fault code “PHL” will be
displayed. The AC motor drive will record the operation time during phase-loss.

	

When phase-loss occurs and Pr.11-07 is set to 0, it won’t display PHL and won’t execute

	

When user sets this parameter to 0 or not factory setting, we won’t promise that all

Pr.06-02.

characteristics will be the same as the 3-phase input.
	

If it is set to 0 or a larger number, it will short the life of rectifier and capacitors in the AC motor
drive.

11-08

Reserved

11-09

Level of Phase-loss

Control
mode

VF

Settings

11-10
4-162

VFPG

SVC

Unit: 0.1
FOCPG TQRPG

Factory Setting: 60.0

0.0 to 320.0

Speed Feed Forward Gain

Unit: 1
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control
mode

Factory Setting: 0

FOCPG

Settings
11-12
Control
mode

0 to 100%

Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area

Factory Setting: 65

FOCPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1

0 to 150% (0: disable)

It is used to control the response speed for the flux weakening area. The larger number you
set, the faster response you will get.

11-13
Control
mode

Notch Filter Depth
FOCPG

Settings
11-14
Control
mode

0 to 20 db

Notch Filter Frequency

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00

FOCPG

Settings
	

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

0.00 to 200.00

This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.

	

The larger number you set Pr.11-13, the better suppression resonance function you will get.

	

The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.

11-15
Control
mode

Gain Value of Slip Compensation

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00

SVC

Settings

0.00 to 1.00

	

It is only valid in SVC mode.

	

When the AC motor drive drives the asynchronous motor, slip will increase when the load is
added. This parameter can be used to change frequency, lower slip and make the motor be
synchronous when running under rated current. When the output current is higher than no-load
current, the AC motor drive will adjust frequency by this parameter. If the actual speed is
slower than expected, please increase the setting or decrease the setting.

11-16
Control
mode

Low-pass Filter Time of Keypad Display
VF

VFPG

SVC

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.100

4-163

Chapter 4 Parameters|

Settings
	

0.001 to 65.535 Sec

It is used to lower the blinking frequency of LCD display.

11-17
Control
mode

Low-pass Filter Time of PG2 Pulse Input
VF

VFPG

Settings
11-18
Control
mode

Control
mode

APR Gain

11-29
Control
mode

FOCPG

0.00 to 40.00

APR Curve Time

4-164

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 3.00

FOCPG

0.00 to 655.35 sec

Reserved

Accumulative Operation Time of Phase-loss
VF

VFPG

Settings
11-30
|
11-40

Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 10.00

Settings
11-20
|
11-28

FOCPG

0.000 to 65.535 Sec

Settings
11-19

SVC

Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.100

SVC

FOCPG TQRPG

Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0

0 to 65535 (hour)

Reserved

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 4 Parameters|

This page intentionally left blank

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

4-165

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting

5.1 Over Current (OC)
ocA

Over-current
during acceleration

Yes

Remove short circuit
or ground fault

ocd

Over current

Check if there is any short circuits and
grounding between the U, V, W and motor
No

Reduce the load or
increase the power
of AC motor drive

No Reduce torque
compensation

OC

Over-current
during acceleration

Yes

No

No
If load is too large

No

No

No

No Suitable torque
compensation

Yes

Yes

Reduce torque
compensation
No

Check if
Check if
acceleration time No deceleration time
is too short by
is too short by
load inertia.
load inertia.
Yes

Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or error
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.

Yes

No

Is load changed
suddenly?
Yes

Yes

Yes Can deceleration
Can acceleration
time be made longer?
time be made longer?
No

No
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive

Increase accel/decel
time

Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Check braking
method. Please
contact DELTA

5-1

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.2 Ground Fault
If output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
is grounded?

GFF
Ground fault

Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.

No

Yes
Remove grounding

5.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage

No

Reduce voltage to
be within spec.

If voltage is within
specification
Yes

If over-voltage is occurred without load
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
DELTA.

Yes

No
No

When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
Yes

Yes

Increase
deceleration
time

No If OV occurs when
sudden acceleration
stops

No

Yes
Increase
acceleration
time

Yes

Yes

Increase setting time

No
Reduce moment
of inertia

No

Reduce moment of load inertia

Need to considerate to
use brake unit and
DC brake

No
Use brake unit or DC brake

No

Yes
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.

5-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage

Yes

Power cut, including momentary
power loss

Restart after reset

No
Check if there is any malfunction Yes
component or disconnection in
power supply circuit

Change defective component
and check connection

No

Change power supply
system for requirement

No

Check if voltage is
within specification
Yes
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system

Yes

Using the different power
supply for this drive and
heavy load system

No
No
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
No

Yes

Check if voltage between +1/+2
and - is greater than Pr.06-00

Suitable power
transformer capacity
Yes
No

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.

Yes
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

5-3

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.5 Over Heat (oH1, oH2, oH3)
AC motor driv e overheats

H eat sink overheats

No

C heck if temper atur e of heat si nk
O
is larger than 90 C

Temperature detection mal functions.
Please contac t DELTA.

Yes
If load is too lar ge

Yes

R educ e load

No
If cooling fan functions normally

No

C hange cooling fan

Yes
Check if cooling fan is jammed

Yes

Remove obstruc tion

No
Check if sur roundi ng temper atur e
is w ithi n specific ation

Yes

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Pleas e contact
D ELTA.

No
Adjust surrounding temperature
to speci fic ati on

5.6 Overload
OL

OL1/ OL2

Check if the setting of electronic
thermal relay is suitable

No

Modify setting

Yes
If load is too large

No

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.

Yes
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive

5-4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.7 Display of KPV-CE01 is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Yes
Turn the power off and power
on again after display is off

Fix connector and eliminate noise
No

No

Display normal?

Check if all connectors are connected
well and if there is no noise
Yes

Yes
AC motor drive works normally

AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.

5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss

Check if the wiring of terminals R, S and T is OK

No

Connect all three
phase well

Yes
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened

No

Tighten all screws

Yes
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced

Yes

Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power

Yes

Please check the fuse
at AC side

No
Check if it is 40hp and above
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

5-5

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.9 Motor cannot Run
Check if CE01
displays
normally

Motor cannot run

Check if non-fuse
No
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON

No

Yes
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN

Yes

Check if there is any
fault code displayed

Check if input
voltage is normal

No
It can run when
no faults occur

Input "RUN"
command
by keypad

No

Yes
No

If jumper or DC
No
reactor is connected
between +1 and +2/B1

Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
disconnection

Use jumper
or DC reactor

Yes

Yes

Press RUN key to
check if it can run

Set them to ON

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

Press UP key to
set frequency

Check if the wiring
Yes
No Check if input FWD No of terminal FWD
Change switch or relay
or REV command
and between
Press UP to
REV-DCM is correct
check if motor
Yes
can run
No
No
No
No
Set frequency or not
Correct connection
Yes
Modify frequency
setting
No
if upper bound freq.
Check if the parameter
and setting freq. is
setting and wiring of
Change defective
lower than the min.
Yes
analog signal and
potentiometer and
output freq.
multi-step speed
relay
No
are correct
Yes

Check if there is any
No
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W

Motor has malfunction
No
If load is too large
Yes

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.

Yes
Yes

Check if the setting
Yes
of torque
compensation
is correct
No

Check if motor
connection
is correct

No

Connect correctly

Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.

Increase the setting of
torque compensation

5-6

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
Motor can run but
cannot change speed

Modify the setting

Yes

No

Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
No
If the setting of frequency
Yes
is out of range(upper/lower)
bound
No

Press UP/DOWN key
Yes
to see if speed has
any change

No

Yes

If there is any change
of the signal that sets Yes
frequency (0-10V and
4-20mA)

If the setting of
Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-14
are the same
No

Modify the setting

No

Check if the wiring between
M1~M6 to DCM is correct

No

Yes

Check if frequency for
each step is different

No Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct

Connect
correctly
No

Yes
Change defective
potentiometer

Yes
Change frequency setting
No If accel./decel. time
is very long
Yes
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia

Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

5-7

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Check if acceleration Yes
time is too short

Motor stalls during
acceleration

Increase setting time

No

Yes

Check if the inertia
of motor and load
are very high
No
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor or AC motor drive

Yes

Yes

Use special motor?
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive

Check if the voltage of
terminal is lower than
before
No

Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive

Yes

Check if the load torque
is too high
No
Check if the torque
Yes
compensation is suitable

Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA

No
Increase torque compensation

5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Motor does not run
as expected

Check if V/f characteristic
and torque compensation
is suitable

No

Adjust V/f characteristic
and lower torque compensation

Yes
Run in low speed continuously

Yes

Please use specific motor

No
If load is too large
No

Yes

Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive

Check if output voltage of U, V W Yes
is balanced

Motor has malfunction

No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.

5-8

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
There are many noises surround the AC motor drives and invade it by radiation or power circuit. It
may cause the misoperation of control circuit and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, that
is a solution to increase the noise tolerance of AC motor drive. But it is not the best one due to the
limit. Therefore, solve it from the outside as following will be the best.
1.

Add surge killer on the relay or contact to suppress switching surge between ON/OFF.

2.

Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial circuit and separate from the main
circuit wiring.

3.

Comply with the wiring regulation for those shielded wire and use isolation amplifier for
long wire.

4.

The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulation and ground independently,
i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machine and power equipment.

5.

Connect a noise filter at the input terminal of the AC motor drive to prevent noise from
power circuit.
In a word, three-level solutions for electromagnetic noise are “no product”, “no spread” and
“no receive”.

5.14 Environmental Condition
Since AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental condition
stated in the appendix A. Following are the remedial measures for necessary.
1.

To prevent vibration, anti-vibration spacer is the last choice. The vibration tolerance must
be within the specification. The vibration effect is equal to the mechanical stress and it
cannot occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damaging AC motor drive.

2.

Store in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent rustiness, poor
contact. It also may cause short by low insulation in a humid location. The solution is to
use both paint and dust-proof. For particular occasion, use the enclosure with whole-seal
structure.

3.

The surrounding temperature should be within the specification. Too high or low
temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage
will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to clean and
periodical check for the air cleaner and cooling fan besides having cooler and sunshade.
In additional, the microcomputer may not work in extreme low temperature and needs to
have heater.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

5-9

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|

4.

Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Do
not turn off the air conditioner and have exsiccator for it.

5.15 Affecting Other Machines
AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machine due to many reasons. The solutions are as
follows.


High Harmonic at Power Side
If there is high harmonic at power side during running, the improved methods are:
1.

Separate power system: use transformer for AC motor drive.

2.

Use reactor at the power input terminal of AC motor drive or decrease high harmonic by
multiple circuit.

3.

If there is phase lead capacitor, it should use serial reactor to prevent capacitor damage
from high harmonic.

serial reactor

phase lead capacitor



5-10

Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is induction motor with ventilation-cooling-type used in variety speed
operation, bad cooling will happen in the low speed. Therefore, it may overheat. Besides,
high harmonic is in output waveform to increase copper loss and iron loss. Following
measures should be used by load situation and operation range when necessary.
1.

Use the motor with independent power ventilation or increase the horsepower.

2.

Use inverter duty motor.

3.

Do NOT run in the low speed

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance

6.1 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The six most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.

NOTE
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal.

6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Fault Name

Fault Descriptions
1.
Over-current during
acceleration
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
acceleration.)
Over-current during
deceleration
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
deceleration.)
Over-current during
steady state
operation
(Output current
exceeds triple rated
current during
constant speed.)
Hardware failure in
current detection

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

2.
3.
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.
3.

Corrective Actions
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output
lines.
Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
Sudden increase in motor loading: Check
for possible motor stall.
AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.

Return to the factory

6-1

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault Name

Fault Descriptions

Ground fault

Short-circuit is
detected between
upper bridge and
lower bridge of the
IGBT module
DC BUS over-voltage
during acceleration
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
DC BUS over-voltage
during deceleration
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
DC BUS over-voltage
in constant speed
(230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
Hardware failure in
voltage detection
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00
during acceleration
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00
during deceleration
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00 in
constant speed
DC BUS voltage is
less than Pr.06-00 at
stop
Phase Loss

6-2

Corrective Actions
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is
grounded, short circuit current is more than
50% of AC motor drive rated current, the AC
motor drive power module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is
provided for AC motor drive protection,
not for protection of the user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the
AC motor drive and motor for possible
short circuits, also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.

Return to the factory

1.
2.
3.

Check if the input voltage falls within the
rated AC motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
If DC BUS over-voltage due to
regenerative voltage, please increase the
Deceleration Time or add an optional
brake resistor.

Check if input voltage is within specification
range and monitor if there is surge voltage.

1.
2.

Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load

Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases
are connected without loose contacts.
For models 40hp and above, please check if
the fuse for the AC input circuit is blown.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault Name

Fault Descriptions

Corrective Actions
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls
within the specified temperature range.
2.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are
not obstructed.
3.
Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty
heat sink fins.
4.
Check the fan and clean it.
5.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
1.
Ensure that the ambient temperature
falls within the specified temperature
range.
2.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are
not obstructed.
3.
Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty
heat sink fins.
4.
Check the fan and clean it.
5.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
1.
Make sure that the motor is not
obstructed.
2.
Ensure that the ambient temperature
falls within the specified temperature
range.
3.
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
Return to the factory
Return to the factory
1.
Make sure that the fan is not obstructed.
2.
Return to the factory
1.

IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature
exceeds protection
level
1 to15HP: 90 oC
20 to 100HP: 100 oC

Heatsink
overheating
Heat sink
temperature exceeds
90oC

Motor overheating
The AC motor drive
detects that the
internal temperature
exceeds Pr.06-30
(PTC level)
OH1 hardware failure
OH2 hardware failure
Fan failure
Overload
The AC motor drive
detects excessive
drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor
drive can withstand
up to 150% of the
rated current for a
maximum of 60
seconds.

1.
2.

1.
Motor 1 overload

2.
3.
1.

Motor 2 overload

2.
3.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.

Check whether the motor 1 is
overloaded.
Check whether the rated current of motor
1 (Pr.05-01) is suitable
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
Check whether the motor 2 is
overloaded.
Check whether the rated current of motor
2 (Pr.05-13) is suitable
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.
6-3

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault Name

Fault Descriptions
Broken fuse
The fuse at DC side
is broken for 30hp
and below
Electronic Thermal
Relay 1/2 Protection
These two fault codes
will be displayed
when output current
exceeds the level of
over-torque detection
(Pr.06-08 or Pr.0611) and it is set 2 or 4
in Pr.06-06 or Pr.0609.
Internal EEPROM
can not be
programmed.
Internal EEPROM
can not be read.
Isum error
U-phase error
V-phase error
W-phase error
CC (current clamp)
OC hardware error
OV hardware error
GFF hardware error
Auto tuning error
PID loss (ACI)
PG feedback error
PG feedback loss
PG feedback stall
PG slip error
Pulse input error
Pulse input loss
ACI loss

External Fault

6-4

1.
2.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Corrective Actions
Check whether the fuse of the transistor
module is functioning well
Check whether the loading side is shortcircuit

Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Check whether motor rated current
setting (Pr.05-01) is suitable
Check electronic thermal relay function
Take the next higher power AC motor
drive model.

1.
2.

Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
Return to the factory.

1.
2.

Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
Return to the factory.

Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still
displayed on the keypad please return to the
factory
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still
displayed on the keypad please return to the
factory
1.
Check cabling between drive and motor
2.
Retry again
1.
Check the wiring of the PID feedback
2.
Check the PID parameters settings
Check if Pr.10-01 is set to 0 when it is PG
feedback control
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
1.
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
2.
Check if the setting of PI gain and
deceleration is suitable
3.
Return to the factory
1.
Check the pulse wiring
2.
Return to the factory
1.
Check the ACI wiring
2.
Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
1.
Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is
closed to GND. Output U, V, W will be
turned off.
2.
Give RESET command after fault has
been cleared.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault Name

Fault Descriptions

Corrective Actions
When the multi-function input terminals
MI1 to MI6 are set to emergency stop,
the AC motor drive stops output U, V, W
and the motor coasts to stop.
2.
Press RESET after fault has been
cleared.
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is
active, the AC motor drive output will be
turned off.
2. Deactivate the external input terminal
(B.B) to operate the AC motor drive
again.
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON
after power OFF to re-enter the correct
password. See Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
Check if the function code is correct (function
code must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
1.

Emergency stop

External Base Block

Password is locked.
Illegal function code
Illegal data address
(00H to 254H)

Check if the communication address is correct

Illegal data value

Check if the data value exceeds max./min.
value

Data is written to
read-only address
Communication
time-out
COM1: exceeds
Pr.09-03 setting,
COM2: exceeds
Pr.09-07 setting
Keypad (KPV-CE01)
communication
time-out
COM1: exceeds
Pr.09-03 setting,
COM2: exceeds
Pr.09-07 setting
Brake resistor fault
Y-connection/Δconnection switch
error
When Pr.07-13 is not
set to 0 and
momentary power off
or power cut, it will
display dEb during
accel./decel. stop.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Check if the communication address is correct

Check if the wiring for the communication is
correct

1.
2.

Check if the wiring for the
communication is correct
Check if there is any wrong with the
keypad

If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad
after pressing “RESET” key, please return to
the factory.
1.

Check the wiring of the Y-connection/Δconnection

2.

Check the parameters settings

1.

Set Pr.07-13 to 0

2.

Check if input power is stable

6-5

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Fault Name

Fault Descriptions
It will be displayed
when slip exceeds
Pr.05-26 setting and
time exceeds Pr.0527 setting.
It will be displayed
when broken belt
detection function is
enabled(Pr.08-59),
allowance error is
higher than Pr.08-61
and detection time
exceeds Pr.08-62.
It will be displayed
when the allowance
error of tension PID
feedback exceeds
Pr.08-63 setting and
allowance error
detection time
exceeds Pr.08-64
setting.

Corrective Actions
1.

Check if motor parameter is correct (please
decrease the load if overload

2.

Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.0527

1.

Check if the belt is broken

2.

Check the settings of Pr.08-60, Pr.08-62
and Pr.08-63

1.

Check if the PID feedback is correct

2.

Check if the material is broken

3.

Check the settings of Pr.08-63 and Pr.0864

6.1.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
STOP
RESET

1.

Press

2.

Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.02-01~Pr.02-06/ Pr.02-23~Pr.02-30 to 5)

key on KPV-CE01.

and then set to be ON.
3.

Send “RESET” command by communication.

NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.

6-6

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

6.2 Maintenance and Inspections
Modern AC motor drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is
required to operate this AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is
recommended to have a check-up of the AC motor drive performed by a qualified technician.

Daily Inspection:
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
1.

Whether the motors are operating as expected.

2.

Whether the installation environment is abnormal.

3.

Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.

4.

Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.

5.

Whether the motors are overheating during operation.

6.

Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.

Periodic Inspection:
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between +1/+2 and -. The voltage between +1/+2 and-should
be less than 25VDC.

DANGER!
1.
2.

Disconnect AC power before processing!
Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are
allowed.

3.

Never reassemble internal components or wiring.

4.

Prevent static electricity.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

6-7

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Periodical Maintenance


Ambient environment
Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily



Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there are any dust, gas, oil or
water drops

Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification

{

If there are any dangerous
objects

Visual inspection

{

Half One
Year Year

Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily

Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct



Measure with multimeter with standard
specification

{

Keypad

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily



Is the display clear for reading

Visual inspection

{

Any missing characters

Visual inspection

{

Half One
Year Year

Mechanical parts

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily

6-8

Half One
Year Year

Half One
Year Year

If there is any abnormal sound
or vibration

Visual and aural inspection

{

If there are any loose screws

Tighten the screws

{

If any part is deformed or
damaged

Visual inspection

{
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily



If there is any color change by
overheating

Visual inspection

{

If there is any dust or dirt

Visual inspection

{

Main circuit

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily



Half One
Year Year

Half One
Year Year

If there are any loose or missing
screws

Tighten or replace the screw

{

If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with color change due to
overheating or ageing

Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate

{

If there is any dust or dirt

Visual inspection

{

Terminals and wiring of main circuit

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily

Half One
Year Year

If the terminal or the plate is
color change or deformation due
to overheat

Visual inspection

{

If the insulator of wiring is
damaged or color change

Visual inspection

{

If there is any damage

Visual inspection

{

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

6-9

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|



DC capacity of main circuit

Check Items

Methods and Criterion

Maintenance
Period
Daily



If there is any leak of liquid,
color change, crack or
deformation

Visual inspection

Measure static capacity when
required

Static capacity

Half One
Year Year

{

≥ initial value X 0.85

{

Resistor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily



Half One
Year Year

If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to overheat

Visual inspection, smell

{

If there is any disconnection

Visual inspection or measure with
multimeter after removing wiring
between +1/+2 ~ Resistor value should be within ± 10%

{

Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily

If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell



Half One
Year Year
{

Visual, aural inspection and smell

Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily

6-10

If there are any loose screws

Visual and aural inspection

{

If the contact works correctly

Visual inspection

{

Half One
Year Year

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|



Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily



Half One
Year Year

If there are any loose screws and
connectors

Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.

{

If there is any peculiar smell and
color change

Visual inspection

{

If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion

Visual inspection

{

If there is any liquid is leaked or
deformation in capacity

Visual inspection

{

Cooling fan of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily



Half One
Year Year

If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration

Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly

{

If there is any loose screw

Tighten the screw

{

If there is any color change due to
overheat

Change fan

{

Ventilation channel of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items

Methods and Criterion
Daily

If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Visual inspection

Half One
Year Year

{

6-11

Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|

This page intentionally left blank

6-12

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix A Specifications

Voltage Class

230V Class
007

015

022

037

055

075

110

150

185

220

300

370

Max. Applicable Motor Output
(kW)

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

1.9

2.7

4.2

6.5

9.5

13

19

25

29

34

46

55

5.0

7.5

11

17

25

33

49

65

75

90

120

146

6.25

9.4

13

21

31

41

61

81

93

112

150

182

68

79

106

126

13

13

36

36

Input Rating

Output Rating

Model Number VFD-XXXV

Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output Current for
Constant Torque (A)
Rated Output Current for
Variable Torque (A)
Maximum Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage

Output Frequency (Hz)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Rated Input Current (A)

0.00~600.00 Hz
15
6.4

9.9

9
15

21

25

6
52

63

3-phase
200-240V, 50/60Hz
± 10%(180~264 V)

Rated Voltage/Frequency
Voltage Tolerance

Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)

33

± 5%(47~63 Hz)

Fan Cooled
10
13
13

Natural

2.7

3.2

4.5

6.8

8

Voltage Class

460V Class

Model Number VFD-XXXV

007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750
0.75 1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15 18.5 22

30

37

45

55

75

Max. Applicable Motor Output
(hp)

1.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

75

100
100

Output Rating

Max. Applicable Motor Output
(kW)

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 2.3
Rated Output Current for
3.0
Constant Torque (A)
Rated Output Current for
3.8
Variable Torque (A)
Maximum Output Voltage (V)

3.2

4.2

6.3

9.9

14

18

24

29

34

46

56

69

80

4.2

6.0

8.5

13

18

24

32

38

45

60

73

91

110 150

5.3

7.5

10

16

22

30

40

47

56

75

91

113 138 188

3-phase Proportional to Input Voltage

Output Frequency (Hz)

0.00~600.00 Hz

Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Input Rating

2.0

Rated Input Current (A)

15

9

4.0

5.8

7.4

9.9

12

Rated Voltage

17

27

42

56

67

87

101 122

36

36

36

50

Fan Cooled

Natural

2.7

3.2

4.5

6.8

8

10

13

13

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04
A-1

35

± 10%(342~528 V)
± 5%(47~63 Hz)

Frequency Tolerance
Weight (kg)

25

3-phase 380 to 480 V

Voltage Tolerance

Cooling Method

6

3-phase 380~480V

13

13

50

Appendix A Specifications|
General Specifications
Control System
Start Torque
Speed Control Range

Control Characteristics

Speed Control Resolution

5Hz (up to 30Hz for vector control)

Max. Output Frequency
Output Frequency Accuracy
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Torque Limit
Torque Accuracy
V/f Curve
Frequency Setting Signal
Brake Torque
Motor Protection
Over-current Protection

Protection Characteristics

1:100 Sensorless vector (up to 1:1000 when using PG card)

± 0.5% Sensorless vector (up to ± 0.02% when using PG card)

Speed Response Ability

Accel/Decel Time

Ground Leakage Current
Protection
Overload Ability
Over-voltage Protection
Over-voltage Protection for
the Input Power
Over-temperature Protection
Compensation for the
Momentory Power Loss

Environmental Conditions

1 V/f curve; 2 V/f+PG; 3 SVC; 4 FOC+PG; 5 TQR+PG
Starting torque is 150% at 0.5Hz and 0Hz with FOC + PG control mode

0.00 to 600.00Hz
Digital command
Digital command

± 0.005%, analog command ± 0.5%

± 0.01Hz, analog command: 1/4096(12-bit) of the max. output
frequency

Max. is 200% torque current

± 5%
0.00 to 600.00/0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
Adjustable V/f curve using 4 independent points and square curve

± 10V, 4~20mA, pulse input
About 20%
Electronic thermal relay protection
The current forces 220% of the over-current protection and 300% of the rated
current
Higher than 50% X rated current
Constant torque: 150% for 60 seconds, variable torque: 200% for 3 seconds
Over-voltage level: Vdc > 400/800V; low-voltage level: Vdc < 200/400V
Varistor (MOV)
Built-in temperature sensor
Up to 5 seconds for parameter setting

Protection Level

NEMA 1/IP21

Operation Temperature

-10oC to 40oC

Storage Temperature

-20 oC to 60 oC

Ambient Humidity
Vibration
Installation Location

Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust

Approvals

A-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories

B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

460V Series

230V Series

Voltage

Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will
void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.
For instance, in 460V series, 100hp/75kW, the AC motor drive needs 2 brake units with total of 16
brake resistors, so each brake unit uses 8 brake resistors. The brake unit should be at least 10 cm
away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference. Refer to the “Brake Unit Module User
Manual” for further details.
Applicable Full Load Resistor value Brake Unit
Brake Resistors Brake Min. Equivalent
Motor
Torque spec for each Model VFDB Model and No. of Torque Resistor Value for
AC Motor
No. of Units
Nm
Units Used
10%ED each AC Motor
hp kW
Drive
Used
Drive
80W 200Ω
82Ω
1
0.75
0.427
BR080W200 1
125
300W 100Ω
82Ω
2
1.5
0.849
BR300W100 1
125
300W 100Ω
82Ω
3
2.2
1.262
BR300W100 1
125
5
3.7
7.5 5.5
10
7.5
15
11
20
15
25 18.5
30
22
40
30
50
37
1
0.75
2
1.5
3
2.2
5
3.7
7.5 5.5
10
7.5
15
11
20
15
25 18.5
30
22
40
30
50
37
60
45
75
55
100 75

2.080
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
10.281
12.338
16.497
20.6
0.427
0.849
1.262
2.080
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
10.281
12.338
16.497
20.6
24.745
31.11
42.7

400W 40Ω
500W 30Ω
1000W 20Ω
2400W 13.6Ω
3000W 10Ω
4800W 8Ω
4800W 6.8Ω
6000W 5Ω
9600W 4Ω
80W 750Ω
300W 400Ω
300W 250Ω
400W 150Ω
500W 100Ω
1000W 75Ω
1000W 50Ω
1500W 40Ω
4800W 32Ω
4800W 27.2Ω
6000W 20Ω
9600W 16Ω
9600W 13.6Ω
12000W 10Ω
19200W 6.8Ω

2015
2015
2022
2022
2015
2015

1
1
1
1
2
2

4030
4030
4030
4030
4030
4045
4045
4030
4045

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2

BR400W040 1
BR500W030 1
BR1K0W020 1
BR1K2W6P8 2
BR1K5W005 2
BR1K2W008 4
BR1K2W6P8 4
BR1K5W005 4
BR1K2W008 8
BR080W750 1
BR300W400 1
BR300W250 1
BR400W150 1
BR500W100 1
BR1K0W075 1
BR1K0W050 1
BR1K5W040 1
BR1K2W008 4
BR1K2W6P8 4
BR1K5W005 4
BR1K2W008 8
BR1K2W6P8 8
BR1K5W005 8
BR1K2W6P8 16

125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125

33Ω
30Ω
20Ω
13.6Ω
10Ω
8Ω
6.8Ω
5Ω
4Ω
160Ω
160Ω
160Ω
130Ω
91Ω
62Ω
39Ω
40Ω
32Ω
27.2Ω
20Ω
16Ω
13.6Ω
10Ω
6.8Ω

NOTE
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-1

Appendix B Accessories|

1.
2.

Please select the factory setting resistance value (Watt) and the duty-cycle value (ED%).
If damage to the drive or other equipment are due to the fact that the brake resistors and the
brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.

3.
4.

Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the
Watt figures.

5.

Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch
power off to the AC motor drive!

6.

When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be
less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the
right-most column in the table). An example of 575V 100HP, the min. equivalent resistor value
for each AC motor drive is 12.5Ω with 2 brake units connection. Therefore, the equivalent
resistor value for each brake unit should be 25Ω.

7.

Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to taking
into operation.

8.

Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the barke usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the
brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake
resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would
decrease accordingly. Suggested cycle time is one minute
10 0%

Br ak e Time

T1

C yc le Time

9.

ED% = T1 /T0 x10 0(% )
T0

For safety consideration, install an overload relay between the brake unit and the brake resistor.
In conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive, it can perform complete
protection against abnormality. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect
the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating
resulted from unusual high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to
prevent damaging the brake resistor.

B-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

NFB
MC

R/L1

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

S/L2

V/T2

IM

T/L3

T/L3

W/T3

MOTOR

VFD Series

O.L.
Thermal
Overload
Relay or
temperature
switch

MC
SA
Surge
Absorber

+(P )

+ (P )

-( N)

-( N)

B1

Thermal Overload
Relay
O.L.
Brake

Brake
Unit

BR Resistor

B2

Temperature
Switch
Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive
user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.
Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.

10.

For model VFD110V43B, the brake unit is built-in. To increase the brake function, it can add
optional brake unit.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-3

Appendix B Accessories|

B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W070, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400,
BR400W150, BR400W040

Model no.
BR080W200
BR080W750

L1

L2

H

D

W

Max. Weight (g)

140

125

20

5.3

60

160

215

200

30

5.3

60

750

265

250

30

5.3

60

930

BR300W070
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
BR400W150
BR400W040

B-4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075

Model no.
BR500W030
BR500W100
BR1KW020
BR1KW075

Max. Weight

L1

L2

H

D

W

335

320

30

5.3

60

1100

400

385

50

5.3

100

2800

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

(g)

B-5

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040

Environment

Protection

Input
Rating

Output Rating

B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit
Max. Motor Power (kW)
Max. Peak Discharge Current
(A) 10%ED
Continuous Discharge Current
(A)
Brake Start-up Voltage (DC)

DC Voltage
Heat Sink Overheat
Alarm Output

4030
30

460V Series
4045
45

4132
132

40

60

40

60

240

15

20

15

18

75

330/345/360/380/400/ 660/690/720/760/800/83 618/642/66
7/690/725/
415±3V
0±6V
750±6V
200~400VDC

400~800VDC

Temperature over +95°C (203 oF)
Relay contact 5A 120VAC/28VDC (RA, RB, RC)

Power Charge Display

Blackout until bus (+~-) voltage is below 50VDC

Installation Location
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity

Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust)
-10°C ∼ +50°C (14oF to 122oF)
-20°C ∼ +60°C (-4oF to 140oF)
90% Non-condensing
9.8m/s2 (1G) under 20Hz
2m/s2 (0.2G) at 20~50Hz
IP50

Vibration

Wall-mounted Enclosed Type

B-6

230V Series
2015
2022
15
22

IP10

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit
(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch])
Figure 1: VFDB2015, VFDB2022, VFDB4030, VFDB4045
121.0 [4.76]
80.0 [3.15]

ERR.
RED

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

200.0 [7.87]

ACT.
YELLOW

189.5 [7.46]

CHARGE
GREEN

130.0 [5.12]

R3.3 [R0.13]

B-7

Appendix B Accessories|

Figure 2: VFDB4132

CHARGE ACT

OC

OH

VFDB4132

B-8

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
For 3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times maximum input current
rating.
(Refer to Appendix A for rated input current)
3-phase
Model

Recommended no-fuse
breaker (A)

Model

Recommended no-fuse
breaker (A)

VFD007V23A-2

10

VFD110V43B-2

50

VFD007V43A-2

5

VFD150V23A-2

125

VFD015V23A-2

15

VFD150V43A-2

60

VFD015V43A-2

10

VFD185V23A-2

150

VFD022V23A-2

30

VFD185V43A-2

75

VFD022V43A-2

15

VFD220V23A-2

175

VFD037V23A-2

40

VFD220V43A-2

100

VFD037V43A-2

20

VFD300V23A-2

225

VFD055V23A-2

50

VFD300V43A-2

125

VFD055V43A-2

30

VFD370V23A-2

250

VFD075V23A-2

60

VFD370V43A-2

150

VFD075V43A-2

40

VFD450V43A-2

175

VFD110V23A-2

100

VFD550V43C-2

250

VFD110V43A-2

50

VFD750V43C-2

300

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-9

Appendix B Accessories|

B.3 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.

B-10

Line Fuse

Model

I (A)
Input

I (A)
Output

I (A)

Bussmann P/N

VFD007V23A-2

5.7

5.0

10

JJN-10

VFD007V43A-2

3.2

2.7

5

JJN-6

VFD015V23A-2

7.6

7.0

15

JJN-15

VFD015V43A-2

4.3

4.2

10

JJN-10

VFD022V23A-2

15.5

11

30

JJN-30

VFD022V43A-2

5.9

5.5

15

JJN-15

VFD037V23A-2

20.6

17

40

JJN-40

VFD037V43A-2

11.2

8.5

20

JJN-20

VFD055V23A-2

26

25

50

JJN-50

VFD055V43A-2

14

13

30

JJN-30

VFD075V23A-2

34

33

60

JJN-60

VFD075V43A-2

19

18

40

JJN-40

VFD110V23A-2

50

49

100

JJN-100

VFD110V43A-2

25

24

50

JJN-50

VFD110V43B-2

25

24

50

JJN-50

VFD150V23A-2

60

65

125

JJN-125

VFD150V43A-2

32

32

60

JJN-60

VFD185V23A-2

75

75

150

JJN-150

VFD185V43A-2

39

38

75

JJN-70

VFD220V23A-2

90

90

175

JJN-175

VFD220V43A-2

49

45

100

JJN-100

VFD300V23A-2

110

120

225

JJN-225

VFD300V43A-2

60

60

125

JJN-125

VFD370V23A-2

142

145

250

JJN-250

VFD370V43A-2

63

73

150

JJN-150

VFD450V43A-2

90

91

175

JJN-175

VFD550V43C-2

130

110

250

JJN-250

VFD750V43C-2

160

150

300

JJN-300

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.4 AC Reactor
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Inductance (mH)

kW

HP

Fundamental
Amps

Max.
continuous
Amps

3% impedance

5% impedance

0.75
1.5

1
2

4
4

6
6

9
6.5

12
9
7.5

2.2

3

8

12

5

3.7

5

8

12

3

5

5.5

7.5

12

18

2.5

4.2

7.5

10

18

27

1.5

2.5

11
15

15
20

25
35

37.5
52.5

1.2
0.8

2
1.2

18.5

25

35

52.5

0.8

1.2

22

30

45

67.5

0.7

1.2

30

40

55

82.5

0.5

0.85

37
45

50
60

80
80

120
120

0.4
0.4

0.7
0.7

55

75

100

150

0.3

0.45

75

100

130

195

0.2

0.3

B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
kW

HP

Fundamental
Amps

Max.
continuous
Amps

0.75

1

8

1.5

2

8

2.2

3

3.7

5

5.5

Inductance (mH)
3% impedance

5% impedance

12

3

5

12

1.5

3

12

18

1.25

2.5

18

27

0.8

1.5

7.5

25

37.5

0.5

1.2

7.5

10

35

52.5

0.4

0.8

11

15

55

82.5

0.25

0.5

15

20

80

120

0.2

0.4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-11

Appendix B Accessories|

Inductance (mH)

kW

HP

Fundamental
Amps

Max.
continuous
Amps

3% impedance

5% impedance

18.5

25

80

120

0.2

0.4

22

30

100

150

0.15

0.3

30

40

130

195

0.1

0.2

37

50

160

240

0.075

0.15

460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase

B-12

Inductance (mH)

kW

HP

Fundamental
Amps

Max.
continuous
Amps

3% impedance

5% impedance

0.75

1

4

6

9

12

1.5

2

4

6

6.5

9

2.2

3

8

12

5

7.5

3.7

5

12

18

2.5

4.2

5.5

7.5

18

27

1.5

2.5

7.5

10

18

27

1.5

2.5

11

15

25

37.5

1.2

2

15

20

35

52.5

0.8

1.2

18.5

25

45

67.5

0.7

1.2

22

30

45

67.5

0.7

1.2

30

40

80

120

0.4

0.7

37

50

80

120

0.4

0.7

45

60

100

150

0.3

0.45

55

75

130

195

0.2

0.3

75

100

160

240

0.15

0.23

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor
Connected in input circuit
Application 1

Question

When more than one AC motor drive is
connected to the same power, one of them is
ON during operation.

When applying to one of the AC motor drive,
the charge current of capacity may cause
voltage ripple. The AC motor drive may
damage when over current occurs during
operation.

Correct wiring

M1

reactor
AC motor drive

motor

AC motor drive

motor

AC motor drive

motor

M2

Mn

Application 2
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive is
connected to the same power.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Question
Surges will be generated at the instant of
silicon rectifier switching on/off. These surges
may damage the mains circuit.

B-13

Appendix B Accessories|

Correct wiring

silicon rectifier
power

reactor
DC

AC motor drive
reactor
motor

Application 3
Used to improve the input power factor, to
reduce harmonics and provide protection
from AC line disturbances. (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC line
reactor should be installed when the power
supply capacity is 500kVA or more and
exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the
mains wiring distance ≤ 10m.

Question
When power capacity is too large, line
impedance will be small and the charge
current will be too large. That may damage
AC motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.

Correct wiring

large-capacity
power

reactor

small-capacity
AC motor drive
motor

B-14

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)

Cable
type
(Note)

Singlecore

Threecore

Recommended Wire
Size
AWG

mm2

≦10 ≦5.3

Nominal
(mm2)

Qty.

Wiring
Method

1

Diagram
A

≦5.5

≦2 ≦33.6

≦38

4

Diagram
B

≦12 ≦3.3

≦3.5

1

Diagram
A

≦1 ≦42.4

≦50

4

Diagram
B

Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.

Diagram A
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.

Zero Phase Reactor
Power
Supply

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

V/T2

T/L3

W/T3

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.

Zero Phase Reactor
Power
Supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

MOTOR

Note 1: The table above gives approximate
wire size for the zero phase reactors but the
selection is ultimately governed by the type
and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable
must fit through the center hole of zero
phase reactors.
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: When long motor output cables are
used an output zero phase reactor may be
required to reduce radiated emissions from
the cable.

MOTOR

B-15

Appendix B Accessories|

B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values
230V DC Choke
Input voltage

230Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase

kW

HP

DC Amps

Inductance (mh)

0.75

1

9

7.50

1.5

2

12

4.00

2.2

3

18

2.75

3.7

5

25

1.75

5.5

7.5

32

0.85

7.5

10

40

0.75

11

15

62

Built-in

15

20

92

Built-in

18.5

25

110

Built-in

22

30

125

Built-in

30

40

--

Built-in

37

50

--

Built-in

kW

HP

DC Amps

Inductance (mh)

460V DC Choke
Input voltage

460Vac

B-16

0.75

1

4

25.00

1.5

2

9

11.50

2.2

3

9

11.50

3.7

5

12

6.00

5.5

7.5

18

3.75

7.5

10

25

4.00

11

15

32

Built-in

50/60Hz

15

20

50

Built-in

3-Phase

18.5

25

62

Built-in

22

30

80

Built-in

30

40

92

Built-in

37

50

110

Built-in

45

60

125

Built-in

55

75

200

Built-in

75

100

240

Built-in

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.7 Remote Controller RC-01
Dimensions are in millimeter

8

6

5

4

16 15 14 13

11

RC-01 terminal block
Wiring connections

AFM ACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 FWD REV JOG

VFD-VE
I/O Block

VFD-VE Programming:
Pr.00-20 set to 2
Pr.00-21 set to 1 (external controls)
Pr.02-00 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)
Pr.02-05 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-17

Appendix B Accessories|

B.8 PG Card (for Encoder)
B.8.1 EMV-PG01X

AB2:
PG2 signal
mode switch

ABZ1:
PG1 signal
mode switch

PS1:
5/12V switch

PG1
Pulse feedback

PG2
Pulse input

1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols

Descriptions
Power source of EMV-PG01X (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V)

VP

Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA
DCM

Power source and input signal common

A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1

Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2-

A2, A2
B2, B2

phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Grounding

2. Wiring Notes
a.

Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).

b.

Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).

3. Wire length (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)
B-18

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Types of Pulse
Generators

Maximum Wire Length

Output Voltage

50m

Open Collector

50m

Line Driver

300m

Complementary

70m

Wire Gauge

1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above

4. Basic Wiring Diagram
wiring 1
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
Non-fuse breaker
R

NFB

S
T
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Factory
setting

Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Digital Signal Common

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1

U

S/L2

V/T2

V

T/L3

W/T3

W

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

Motor

M
3~

VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1

PG
Line driver
incremental encoder

VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
DCM

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

manual pulse generator
(MPG)
10- 17
10- 18

Line driver

B-19

Appendix B Accessories|

wiring 2
jumper
Non-fuse breaker
R

NFB

S
T
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1

Factory
setting

Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Digital Signal Common

Braking resistor (optional)

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1

U

S/L2

V/T2

V

T/L3

W/T3

W

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6

VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1

DCM

Motor

M
3~

PG
Line driver
incremental encoder

phase difference is 90 o

5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
ABZ1+ PS1

Types of Pulse Generators

AB2+PS1

5V

12V

5V

12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

VOLTAGE
VCC
O/P
0V

Open collector
VCC
O/P

0V
B-20

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

ABZ1+ PS1

Types of Pulse Generators

Line driver
Q

AB2+PS1

5V

12V

5V

12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

Q

Complementary
VCC

O/P

0V

B.8.2 EMV-PG01O

PG OUT
Pulse output
AB2: PG2 signal
mode switch

PS1:
5/12V switch

ABZ1: PG1 signal
mode switch

PG1
Pulse feedback

PG2
Pulse input

1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal

Descriptions

Symbols
VP

Power source of EMV-PG01O (use PS1 to switch 12V/5V)
Output Voltage: +5V/+12V±5% 200mA

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-21

Appendix B Accessories|

Terminal

Descriptions

Symbols
DCM

Power source and input signal common

A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1

Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be
1-phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal from encoder. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-

A2, A2
B2, B2

phase or 2-phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec

A/O, B/O, Z/O

Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), open
collector: max. output DC20V 50mA
Grounding

2. Wiring Notes
a.

Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).

b.

Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).

3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)

Types of Pulse
Generators

Maximum Wire Length

Output Voltage

50m

Open Collector

50m

Line Driver

300m

Complementary

70m

Wire Gauge

1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above

4. Basic Wiring Diagram

B-22

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

wiring 1
j umpe r
Bra ke re sisto r (o ptio na l)
No -fuse bre ake r
R

NFB

S
T
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Multi-step 1

Factory
setting

Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Digital S ignal Common

man ual p ul se g ene rato r
(MPG)
10-17
10-18

Li ne dri ver

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L 1
U/T1

U

S/L2

V/T2

V

T/L3

W/T3

W

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
DC M

VP
DC M
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1

Moto r

M
3~

PG
Li ne dri ver
i ncre me ntal e ncod er

VP
DC M
A/O
B/O
Z/O

EMV- PG0 1O

wiring 2
j umpe r
No -fuse bre ake r
R

NFB

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L 1
U/T1

U

S

S/L2

V/T2

V

T

T/L3

W/T3

W

FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Factory
setting

Bra ke re sisto r (o ptio na l)

Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi- step 4
No function
No function
Digital Signal Common

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

Moto r

M
3~

VP
DC M
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1

PG
Li ne dri ver
i ncre me ntal e ncod er

EH -P LC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
CO M

A2
A2
B2
B2
DC M

VP
DC M
A/O
B/O
Z/O

Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1

phase diff erence is 90

o

EMV-PG01O

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-23

Appendix B Accessories|

5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
ABZ1+PS1

Types of Pulse Generators

AB2+PS1

5V

12V

5V

12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

OC 12V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

TP 5V

VOLTAGE
VCC
O/P
0V

Open collector
VCC
O/P

0V

Line driver
Q
Q

Complementary
VCC

O/P

0V

B-24

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.8.3 EMV-PG01L

PG OUT
pulse output

AB2: PG2 signal
mode switch

ABZ1: PG1 signal
mode switch

PG1
pulse feedback

PG2
pulse input

1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal

Descriptions

Symbols

Power source of EMV-PG01L

VP

Output Voltage: +5V±5% 200mA
DCM

Power source and input signal common

A1, A1
B1, B1
Z1, Z1

Input signal. Input type is selected by ABZ1. It can be 1-phase or 2phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec
Input signal. Input type is selected by AB2. It can be 1-phase or 2-

A2, A2
B2, B2

phase input. Maximum 300kP/sec

A/O, B/O, Z/O

Output signal. It has division frequency function (Pr.10-16), Line
driver: max. output DC5V 50mA
Grounding

2. Wiring Notes
a.

Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires
parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-25

Appendix B Accessories|

b.

Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm2 (AWG24 to AWG18).

3. Wire length: (wire length and signal frequency are in inverse proportion)

Types of Pulse
Generators

Maximum Wire Length

Output Voltage

50m

Open Collector

50m

Line Driver

300m

Complementary

70m

Wire Gauge

1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above

4. Basic Wiring Diagram
wiring 1
jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
Non-fuse breaker
R

NFB

S
T
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Factory
setting

Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Digital Signal Common

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1

U

S/L2

V/T2

V

T/L3

W/T3

W

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

Motor

M
3~

VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1

PG
Line driver
incremental encoder

AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO

B-26

VP
A2
A2
B2
B2
DCM

manual pulse generator
(MPG)
10- 17
10- 18

Line driver

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

wiring 2
jumper
Non-fuse breaker
R

NFB

- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1

S

S/L2

T

T/L3

FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Factory
setting

Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
No function
No function
Digital Signal Common

Braking resistor (optional)

+24V
FWD
REV
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
DCM

U

V/T2

M
3~

W

W/T3

VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO

Motor

V

PG
Line driver
incremental encoder

phase difference is 90 o

5. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
Types of Pulse Generators

ABZ1

AB2

5V

5V

OC

OC

TP

TP

OC

OC

TP

TP

VOLTAGE
VCC
O/P
0V

Open collector
VCC
O/P

0V

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-27

Appendix B Accessories|

Types of Pulse Generators

Line driver
Q
Q

ABZ1

AB2

5V

5V

OC

OC

TP

TP

OC

OC

TP

TP

Complementary
VCC

O/P

0V

B-28

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference
AC Drives

Model Number

FootPrint

VFD007V43A-2, VFD015V43A-2, VFD022V43A-2

RF022B43AA

Y

VFD037V43A-2

RF037B43BA

Y

VFD055V43A-2, VFD075V43A-2, VFD110V43A-2,
VFD110V43B-2

RF110B43CA

Y

VFD007V23A-2, VFD015V23A-2

10TDT1W4C

N

VFD022V23A-2, VFD037V23A-2

26TDT1W4C

N

VFD055V23A-2, VFD075V23A-2, VFD150V43A-2,
VFD185V43A-2

50TDS4W4C

N

VFD110V23A-2, VFD150V23A-2, VFD220V43A-2,
VFD300V43A-2, VFD370V43A-2

100TDS84C

N

VFD550V43A-2, VFD750V43A-2, VFD550V43C-2,
VFD750V43C-2

200TDDS84C

N

VFD185V23A-2, VFD220V23A-2, VFD300V23A-2,
VFD450V43A-2

150TDS84C

N

VFD370V23A-2

180TDS84C

N

Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise
and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an
EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use
DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed
and wired according to user manual:


EN61000-6-4



EN61800-3: 1996 + A11: 2000



EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)

General precaution
1.
2.

EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to
the AC motor drive.

3.

Please wire as short as possible.

4.

Metal plate should be grounded.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-29

Appendix B Accessories|

5.

The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and
the contact area should be as large as possible.

Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1.

Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

2.

The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length
and maximum contact area.

3.

Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.

saddle

the plate with grounding

Saddle on both ends

Saddle on one end

B-30

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

The length of motor cable
When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge
voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the
motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation
quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
Use a motor with enhanced insulation.



Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive



The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible



For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:

(10 to 20 m or less)

Insulation level of motor

1000V

1300V

1600V

460VAC input voltage

66 ft (20m)

328 ft (100m)

1312 ft (400m)

230VAC input voltage

1312 ft (400m)

1312 ft (400m)

1312 ft (400m)

For models 5hp/3.7kW and less:



Insulation level of motor

1000V

1300V

1600V

460VAC input voltage

66 ft (20m)

165 ft (50m)

165 ft (50m)

230VAC input voltage

328 ft (100m)

328 ft (100m)

328 ft (100m)

NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may
malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less.
To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier
frequency).

NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor
drive.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-31

Appendix B Accessories|



If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may
cause leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage
current or not insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor
drive may damage.



If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the
sum of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.

B-32

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

B.9.1 Dimensions
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Order P/N: RF015B21AA / RF022B43AA

118

50
(1.97)
28
(1.1)

90
(3.54)

226
(8.9)

16
(0.63)

24
(0.94)

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

226 239
(8.9) (9.4)

5.5
(3.37)

B-33

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: RF022B21BA / RF037B43BA

60

150

30

110

302

15

B-34

30

302

315

5.5

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: RF110B43CA

60

200

33

120

382

20

26

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

382

398

7.0

B-35

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: 10TDT1W4C

Order P/N: 26TDT1W4C

B-36

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: 50TDS4W4C

Order P/N: 100TDS84C

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-37

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: 200TDDS84C

Order P/N: 150TDS84C

B-38

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Order P/N: 180TDS84C

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-39

Appendix B Accessories|

B.10 Multi-function I/O Extension Card
B.10.1 Functions
EMV-APP01 optional multi-function I/O extension card is exclusively designed for VFD-VE
series and used with firmware version 2.04 and above. It communicates with the AC motor
drive by RS-485 communication port (COM1). To make sure that the communication is
normal, it needs to set the COM1 communication protocol to RTU mode (8, N, 1), i.e. set
Pr.09-04 to 12 no matter what the baud rate switch is set.
Communi cation
indicator
Power indi cator

High/Low baud rate switch

RS485 port
Analog s ignal common
Output power

Multi-function
input terminals

Multi-function
output ter minals

Analog output
terminals

Multi-function
output common terminal

NOTE
Please operate by the following steps for switching the high/low baud rate,
1. make sure that RS-485 cable is disconnected before operation
2. switch the high/low baud rate
3. set Pr.09-01 to the corresponding baud rate to finish setting
If the RS-485 cable is connected before changing the high/low baud rate, the
communication function will still be invalid even if the communication baud rate (Pr.09-01) is
changed to the corresponding baud rate and the ERROR indicator is normal.
Terminals

POWER

Description
Power indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 connects to the AC motor drive
correctly.

ERROR

ERROR indicator. It will be ON when EMV-APP01 can communicate with the AC
motor drive or it will blink.
Baud rate switch for extension card:

HIGH/LOW HIGH: set the baud rate to 115200
LOW: set the baud rate to 9600

B-40

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

Terminals
5V
GND

Description
Output power 500mA Max
Analog signal common terminal

NOTE
This GND terminal is only used for 5V terminal on EMV-APP01. Please do NOT
confuse with DCM terminal.
SO1-MCM Multi-function analog voltage output terminal 0~10.0V (output current: 2mA Max.)
SO2-MCM Analog output is set by Pr.03-21 and Pr.03-24.
MI7~MIB

Multi-function input terminals
Please refer to Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-27 for MI7-GND~MIB-GND function selection. Take
terminals MI7-GND for example, ON: the activation current is 6.5mA and OFF:
leakage current tolerance is 10μA.

MO3~MOA Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
The AC motor drive outputs each monitor signal, such as during operation, frequency
attained and overload, by transistor with open collector. Please refer to Pr.03-35 to
Pr.03-42 for details.
Ma x: 48 Vd c/50 mA

MO3~M OA-MC M
MO 3
~
MOA

internal c ircui t

MCM

MC M

Multi-function output common terminal. Max: 48Vdc/50mA

NOTE
This MCM terminal is only used with MO3~MOA on EMV-APP01. Please do NOT
confuse with terminal MCM.

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-41

Appendix B Accessories|

B.10.2 Dimensions

B.10.3 Wiring

Analog signal common
refer to Pr.02-35 to Pr.02-42

Output power

refer to Pr.03-21 to Pr.03-24
refer to Pr.02-23 to Pr.02-27

When wiring, please refer to the multi-function input/output function in parameters group 02
and group 03 of chapter 4 parameters to set by your applications.

B-42

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix B Accessories|

This page intentionally left blank

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

B-43

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the
motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the
required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Item
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Load type
Inertia load
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Load speed and
Constant output
torque
Decreasing torque
characteristics
Decreasing output
Constant load
Shock load
Load
Repetitive load
characteristics
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification

Speed and
torque
characteristics

Time
ratings

Overload
capacity

●

Starting
torque

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

C.1 Capacity Formulas

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

C-1

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=

⎛
k×N
GD 2 N ⎞
⎜⎜ TL +
× ⎟ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive ( kVA)
973 × η × cos ϕ ⎝
375 t A ⎟⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds



The starting capacity=

k×N

η × cos ϕ

[n

⎡

T

+ ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 +
⎢⎣

⎤
ns
(ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
⎥⎦
nT

Acceleration time ≧60 seconds



The starting capacity=

k×N

η × cos ϕ

[n

T

⎡

+ ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 +
⎣⎢

⎤
ns
(ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
nT
⎦⎥

2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)


Acceleration time ≦60 seconds

nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ 1.5 × the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)



Acceleration time ≧60 seconds

nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)

C-2

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

2.3 When it is running continuously
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC



motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=

k × PM

η × cosϕ

≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)

The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive



k × 3 × VM × IM × 10−3 ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)



k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Symbol explanation

PM

: Motor shaft output for load (kW)

η

: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)

cos ϕ

: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)

VM

: Motor rated voltage(V)

IM

: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power

k

: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on
PWM method)

PC1

: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)

kS

: Starting current/rated current of motor

nT
nS

: Number of motors in parallel

GD 2

: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)

TL

: Load torque

tA

: Motor acceleration time

N

: Motor speed

: Number of simultaneously started motors

C.2 General Precaution
Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

C-3

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

Selection Note
1.

When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.

2.

When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).

3.

The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.

4.

When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.

Parameter Settings Note
1.

The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.

2.

High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.

3.
4.

Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.

C-4

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1.

The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.

2.

Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.

3.

When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.

4.

The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:

Load duty-cycle

25%
100

40% 60%

torque(%)

82
70
60
50

0

5.

continuous

3 6

20
Frequency (Hz)

60

If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.

6.

Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.

7.

Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.

8.

Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

C-5

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|



Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be
used to mount equipment that runs at varying speed.



Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and
higher frequency.


9.

To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.

The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.

Special motors:
1.

Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).

2.

Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.

3.

Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.

4.

Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.

5.

Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.

Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts
and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above,
lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
C-6

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains
power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):

AC motor drive

Motor

180
60 seconds

155
140
100
80
55
38
03 20

180
150
torque (%)

torque (%)

45
35
03 20

50
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

55
38
60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz

60 seconds

100
85
68

100

0 3 20

60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz

140
130

60 seconds

155
torque (%)

torque (%)

180

60 seconds

100
80
45
35
0 3 20 50
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz

C-7

Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|

This page intentionally left blank.

C-8

Revision August 2008, 03VE, SW V2.04

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2008:08:08 17:22:01+08:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2008:08:11 09:20:40+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:08:11 09:20:40+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Preface
Creator                         : Melody
Document ID                     : uuid:2036b405-255a-43fc-8d9f-6676a8bc62aa
Instance ID                     : uuid:a50fff37-bb73-4bcf-8410-79b771e26c65
Company                         : Delta
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 291
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Author                          : Melody

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Delta Electronics Ac Motor Drive Vfd Ve Series Users Manual Preface

Delta-Ac-Motor-Drive-Vfd-Ve-Series-Users-Manual-244556 delta-ac-motor-drive-vfd-ve-series-users-manual-244556

VFD-VE Series to the manual 0c97e4d2-6f85-48f8-9896-570cfef49bdd

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation